WO1995025118A2 - Inhibitors of sh2 domain interactions - Google Patents

Inhibitors of sh2 domain interactions Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO1995025118A2
WO1995025118A2 PCT/US1995/003225 US9503225W WO9525118A2 WO 1995025118 A2 WO1995025118 A2 WO 1995025118A2 US 9503225 W US9503225 W US 9503225W WO 9525118 A2 WO9525118 A2 WO 9525118A2
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
amino
dihydro
phenyl
carbonylmethyl
acetyl
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/US1995/003225
Other languages
French (fr)
Other versions
WO1995025118A3 (en
Inventor
William W. Bachovchin
Original Assignee
Trustees Of Tufts University
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Trustees Of Tufts University filed Critical Trustees Of Tufts University
Publication of WO1995025118A2 publication Critical patent/WO1995025118A2/en
Publication of WO1995025118A3 publication Critical patent/WO1995025118A3/en

Links

Classifications

    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07KPEPTIDES
    • C07K5/00Peptides containing up to four amino acids in a fully defined sequence; Derivatives thereof
    • C07K5/04Peptides containing up to four amino acids in a fully defined sequence; Derivatives thereof containing only normal peptide links
    • C07K5/10Tetrapeptides
    • C07K5/1027Tetrapeptides containing heteroatoms different from O, S, or N
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K38/00Medicinal preparations containing peptides

Definitions

  • signal transduction is generally initiated by the interaction of extracellular factors (for example, hormones, adhesion molecules, cytokines, and the like) with membrane receptors on the cell surface. These extracellular signals are transduced to the inner face of the cell membrane, where the cytoplasmic domains of receptor molecules make contact with intracellular targets.
  • extracellular factors for example, hormones, adhesion molecules, cytokines, and the like
  • the initial receptor-target interactions stimulate a cascade of additional molecular interactions involving multiple intracellular pathways that disseminate the signal throughout the cell. These complex, branching pathways coordinate the multifunctional cellular programs that trigger changes in cell behavior.
  • Src homology 2 (SH2) domains were first identified from sequence similarities in the noncatalytic regions of Src-related tyrosine kinases, spanning approximately 100 amino acid residues (Sadowski et al. (1986) Mol. Cell. Biol. 6:4396-4408). The subsequent discovery that SH2 domains bind to specific phosphorylated tyrosine residues has provided a link between tyrosine kinases and proteins that respond to tyrosine phosphorylation (for reviews see Koch et al. (1991) Science 252:668-674; Pawson and Gish, (1992) Cell 71:359-362; Mayer and Baltimore, (1993) Trends Cell Biol. 3:8-13).
  • SH2 domains serve to localize these proteins to activated receptors and are implicated in the modulation of enzymatic activity (O'Brien et al. (1990) Mol.
  • SH2 domains share the common property of binding phosphotyrosine- containing peptides
  • additional biological specificity resides in the sequence contexts of the phosphotyrosine.
  • Evidence that the binding of a particular SH2 domain to tyrosine- phosphorylated proteins is dependent on the primary sequence around the phosphotyrosine (pTyr) came from a comparison of the sequences of the regions of polyoma middle T and the platelet-derived growth factor (PDGF) receptor that bind phosphatidylinositol 3-kinase (Cantley et al. (1991) Cell 64:281-302).
  • PDGF platelet-derived growth factor
  • the subject compounds are represented by the general formula ⁇ -amino-N-[l-(2-AA-2-oxoethyl)-l-azepin-3-yl]-PTyr (Formula I), wherein PTyr -represents a phosphotyrosine or a phosphotyrosine analog which is carboxy- terminally linked with a 3-amino moiety of the azepine, and AA represents a peptide or single amino acid residue amino-terminally linked through a peptide bond with the 2-oxoethyl moiety of the azepine.
  • the azepine core mimics a dipeptidyl amide backbone, and the PTyr, the azepine, and the AA together form a peptidyl analog of the general formula PTyr-Xaa- Xaa-AA.
  • PTyr can further include an additional amino acid residue or peptide, or similar azepine moiety, linked in a peptidyl bond to the N-terminus of the phosphotyrosine in order to further extend the peptidomimetic amino terminally.
  • pho iety pTyr
  • pTyr The pho iety, pTyr, can be represented by the general formula
  • R j 5 and R 16 each independently represent hydrogen, a lower alkyl, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, or R15 and R j 6 taken together with the O-P-O, O-B-O, O-V-O or O-As-O atoms to which they are attached complete a heterocyclic ring having from 5 to 8 atoms in the ring structure.
  • pTyr is a non-hydrolyzable phosphotyrosine analog.
  • the j ⁇ r ⁇ -substituted phenylalanine is also the most preferred.
  • the azepine is preferably a 1 ,4-diazepine, such as a 1,4- benzodiazepine.
  • the compound can be a derivative of a 3-amino-l-(2- oxoethyl)-l,4-benzodiazepin-2-one, where the phosphotyrosine analog is covalently attached to the benzodiazepine by an amide bond with the 3-amino moiety, and the amino acid residue (or peptide) AA is attached to the benzodiazepine by an amide bond with said 1-oxoethyl moiety.
  • the peptidomimetic can be synthesized having a 1 -azepine core, such as a 1 -benzoazepine or a 1-pyridinoazepine.
  • Another aspect of the present invention provides a boronopenyl moiety in a wide range of compounds, the boronophenyl compound represented by the general formula V:
  • Y' represents a substitution at one of the meta, ortho or para positions of the phenyl moiety, Y' being a borono given by the general formula
  • Rj 5 and Rjg each independently represent hydrogen, a lower alkyl, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, or R ⁇ 5 and R 16 taken together with the O-B-O atoms to which they are attached complete a heterocyclic ring having from 5 to 8 atoms in the ring structure;
  • R'l 4 is absent or represents one or more substituents at remaining ring positions, which substituents are selected from halogens, lower alkyls, lower alkoxys, a hydroxyl, amino, nitro, thiol, amines, imines, amides, carbonyls, carboxyls, silyls, ethers, thioethers, sulfonyls, selenoethers, ketones, aldehydes, esters, or -(CH2) m -R7, -CF3, or -CN
  • X 8 and X 9 each, independently, represent a methylene, an ethylene, an acetylene, an amine, a carbonyl, a phosphonyl, a sulfer, an oxygen, or a selenium;
  • R'l7 is absent, or represents hydrogen, halogens, alkyls, alkenyls, alkynyls, hydroxyl, amino, nitro, thiol, amines, imines, amides, phosphoryls, phosphonates, phosphines, carbonyls, carboxyls, silyls, ethers, thioethers, sulfonyls, selenoethers, ketones, aldehydes, esters, or -(CH2) m -R-7 > or R'17 represents an amino acid residue or peptide condensed with
  • R'3 is absent, or represents hydrogen, halogens, alkyls, alkenyls, alkynyls, hydroxyl, amino, nitro, thiol, amines, imines, amides, phosphoryls, phosphonates, phosphines, carbonyls, carboxyls, silyls, ethers, thioethers, sulfonyls, selenoethers, ketones, aldehydes, esters, or -(CH2) m -R7, or R'3 represents an amino acid residue or peptide condensed with X9;
  • R 7 represents an aryl, a cycloalkyl, a cycloalkenyl, a heterocycle or a polycycle; m, independently for each occurence in formula V, is zero or an integer in the range of 1 to 8; and n is 1, 2 or 3.
  • this moiety is provided as part of A peptidomimetic.
  • the peptidomimietic being a peptide or peptide analog including one or more amino acid residues having sidechains represented by the formula:
  • Y', R15, R ⁇ , R'14 and n are as defined above, and the peptidomimetic is at least a dipeptide in length.
  • the subject peptidomimetics by selectively binding to a phosphotyrosine binding site of an SH2 domain, can be used to inhibit binding of a protein containing said SH2 domain with a phosphotyrosine residue of a target phosphoprotein. It is thus another aspect of the present invention to utilize the subject peptidomimetics to modulate intracellular signaling pathways by disrupting particular protein-protein interactions mediated by SH2 domains.
  • the SH2 inhibitors of the present invention can be used to affect the responsiveness of a cell to a growth factor, cytokine or other receptor ligand; as an immunosuppressant; to prevent osteoclastic resorption of bone during osteoporosis; influence differentiation of cells; to modulate cellular response to interactions with the extracellular matrix, as well as affect the production and secretion of extracellular matrix components; prevent viral infection and/or viral-mediated transformation of cells; and to inhibit the proliferation of transformed cells or to render transformed cells more sensitive to cytostatic or cytotoxic agents.
  • the SH2 target of the subject inhibitors can range from the interaction between, for example, an activated receptor complex and the initial cytoplasmic proteins involved in triggering a particular set of intracellular signaling pathways, to the last SH2-mediated interaction in a specific pathway, such as the formation of a transcription factor complex or allosteric regulation of an enzymatic activity.
  • the inhibitors of the present invention can be used to prevent the interaction between a phosphotyrosine residue and such SH2-containing signal transduction proteins as, for example, Src, Lck, Fps, phosphatidylinositol-3-kinases, ras GTPase-activating protein, Fyn, Lyk, Fgr, Fes, ZAP-70, Abl, Crk, Nek, Sem-5, p85, phospholipase C, SHPTP1, SHPTP2, corkscrew, Syk, Lyn, Yes, Hck, Dsrc, Tec, Atk/Bpk, Itk/Tsk, Arg, Csk, tensin, Vav, She, Emt, Grb2, Syp, Blk, Bpk 113TF, 91TF, and Janus kinases including Tyk2, JAK1 and JAK2.
  • SH2-containing signal transduction proteins as, for example, Src, Lck, Fps
  • Figures 1A, IB and 1C illustrate general reaction schemes for generating the subject peptidomimetics having 1 ,4-diazepine cores.
  • Figures 2A, 2B, 2C, and 2D depict a synthesis scheme for generating a benzodiazepine of the present invention by cyclization of an ⁇ -aminoglycine and a 2-amino benzophenone.
  • Figure 3 shows yet another multistep synthetic approach useful in obtaining the present peptidomimetics, beginning with a 2-aminocyclic ketone.
  • Figure 4 illustrates a synthetic approach for generating the subject peptidomimetics comprising an azepine core having only one heteratom.
  • Figures 5 A-5I illustrate the synthesis of p-(boronoalkyl)phenylalanine which can be utilized to generate the boronic acid analogs of phosphotyrosine described herein.
  • Figure 6 is an autoradiogram of a gel visualizing the ability of a G$>T-fyn fusion protein to bind to phosphorylated polyoma middle T antigen, in the presence and absense of a peptidomimetic of the present invention.
  • Figure 7 is an inhibition profile illustrating the ability of the subject peptidomimetic to inhibit an lck-SR2 interaction.
  • Figure 8 illustrates the synthesis of the trans-olefin analog of a YEEI peptide.
  • alkyl is recognized in the art and refers to saturated aliphatic groups having one to ten carbon atoms, including straight-chain alkyl groups, branched-chain alkyl groups, cycloalkyl (alicyclic) groups, alkyl substituted cycloalkyl groups, and cycloalkyl substituted alkyl groups.
  • a straight chain or branched chain alkyl has 30 or fewer carbon atoms in its backbone (e.g., C1-C30 for straight chain, C3-C3 0 for branched chain), and more preferably 20 of fewer.
  • preferred cycloalkyls have from 4-10 carbon atoms in their ring structure, and more preferably have 5, 6 or 7 carbons in the ring structure.
  • alkyl as used throughout the specification and claims is intended to include both "unsubstituted alkyls" and “substituted alkyls", the latter of which refers to alkyl moieties having substituents replacing a hydrogen on one or more carbons of the hydrocarbon backbone.
  • substituents can include, for example, a halogen, a hydroxyl, a carbonyl, an alkoxyl, and ester, a phosphoryl, an amine, an amide, an imine, a thiol, a thioether, a thioester, a sulfonyl, an amino, a nitro, or an organometallic moiety.
  • the moieties substituted on the hydrocarbon chain can themselves be substituted, if appropriate.
  • the substituents of a substituted alkyl may include substituted and unsubstituted forms of amines, imines, amides, phosphoryls (including phosphonates and phosphines), sulfonyls (including sulfates and sulfonates), and silyl groups, as well as ethers, thioethers, selenoethers, carbonyls (including ketones, aldehydes, carboxylates, and esters), -CF 3 , -CN and the like. Exemplary substitued alkyls are described below.
  • Cycloalkyls can be further substituted with alkyls, alkenyls, alkoxys, thioalkyls, aminoalkyls, carbonyl-substituted alkyls, CF 3 , CN, and the like.
  • alkenyl and alkynyl refer to unsaturated aliphatic groups analogous in length and possible substitution to the alkyls described above, but which contain at least one double or triple bond respectively.
  • lower alkyl as used herein means an alkyl group, as defined above, but having from one to ten carbons, more preferably from one to six carbon atoms in its backbone structure.
  • lower alkenyl and “lower alkynyl” have similar chain lengths. It will be understood that every occurence of “alkyl”, “alkenyl” and “alkynyl” in the specification can be replaced, in preferred embodiments, with “lower alkyl”, “lower akenyl” and “lower alkynyl”, respectively, to reflect C ] -CJO aliphates.
  • the term "amino” means -NH 2 ; the term “nitro” means -NO 2 ; the term “halogen” designates -F, -Cl, -Br or -I; the term “thiol” means -SH; the term “hydroxyl” means -OH; the term “sulfonyl” means -SO 2 -; and the term “organometallic” refers to a metallic atom (such as mercury, zinc, lead, magnesium or lithium) or a metalloid (such as silicon, arsenic or selenium) which is bonded directly to a carbon atom, such as a diphenylmethylsilyl group.
  • alkylamine as used herein means an alkyl group, as defined above, having a substituted or unsubstituted amine attached thereto.
  • an “amine” can be represented by the general formula:
  • R7 represents an aryl, a cycloalkyl, a cycloalkenyl, a heterocycle or a polycycle; and
  • m is zero or an integer in the range of 1 to 8.
  • alkylamide refers to an alkyl group having a substituted or unsubstituted amide group attached thereto.
  • an “amide” can be represented by the general formula:
  • R 8 and R9 are as defined above.
  • alkylimine refers to an alkyl group having a substituted or unsubstituted imine attached thereto.
  • An “imine” can be represented by the general formula:
  • thioalkyl refers to an alkyl group, as defined above, having a sulfhydryl or thioether group attached thereto.
  • the "thioether” moiety is represented by one of -S-alkyl, -S-alkenyl, -S-alkynyl, and -S-(CH 2 ) m -R 7 , wherein m and R 7 are defined above.
  • carbonyl-substituted alkyl as used herein means an alkyl group, as defined above, having a substituted or unsubstituted carbonyl group attached thereto, and includes aldehydes, ketones, carboxylates and esters.
  • the "carbonyl” moiety is represented by the general formula:
  • alkoxyl or "alkoxy” as used herein refers to an alkyl group, as defined above, having an oxygen radical attached thereto.
  • Representative alkoxyl groups include methoxy. ethoxy, propoxy, tert-butoxy and the like.
  • An "ether” is two hydrocarbons covalently linked by an oxygen. Accordingly, the substituent of an alkyl which renders that alkyl an ether is or resembles an alkoxyl, such as can be represented by one of -O-alkyl, -O- alkenyl. -O-alkynyl, -O-(CH2) m -R7, where m and R7 are described above.
  • metaloalkyl refers to an alkyl group, as defined above, having a substituted or unsubstituted organometallic group attached thereto.
  • a “silyl alkyl” is an alkyl having a substituted silicon attached thereto.
  • the "silyl" moiety which may be substituted on the alkyl can be represented by the general formula:
  • Rj 0 , R' ⁇ o and R" ⁇ o independently represent a hydrogen, an alkyl, an alkenyl. or -(CH 2 ) m -R 7 , m and R 7 being defined above.
  • a “selenoalkyl” refers to an alkyl group having a substituted seleno group attached thereto.
  • Exemplary “selenoethers” which may be substituted on the alkyl are selected from one of -Se-alkyl, -Se-alkenyl, -Se-alkynyl, and -Se-(CH 2 ) m -R7, m and R7 being defined above.
  • the term “sulfonate” as used herein means a sulfonyl group, as defined above, attached to an alkyl or aryl group.
  • a sulfonate has the structure :
  • R j i is an alkyl or an aryl.
  • Analogous substitutions can be made to alkenyl and alkynyl groups to produce, for example, alkenylamines, alkynylamines, alkenylamides, alkynylamides, alkenylimines, alkynylimines, thioalkenyls, thioalkynyls, carbonyl-substituted alkenyls or alkynyls, alkenoxyls, alkynoxyls, metalloalkenyls and metalloalkynyls.
  • aryl as used herein includes 4-, 5-, 6- and 7-membered single-ring aromatic groups which may include from zero to four heteroatoms, for example, benzene, pyrrole, furan, thiophene, imidazole, oxazole, thiazole, triazole, pyrazole, pyridine, pyrazine, pyridazine and pyrimidine, and the like. Those aryl groups having heteroatoms in the ring structure may also be referred to as "aryl heterocycle”.
  • the aromatic ring can be substituted at one or more ring positions with such substituents as described above, as for example, halogens, alkyls, alkenyls, alkynyls, hydroxyl, amino, nitro, thiol amines, imines, amides, phosphonates, phosphines, carbonyls, carboxyls, silyls, ethers, thioethers, sulfonyls, selenoethers, ketones, aldehydes, esters, or -(CH 2 ) m -R 7 , -CF3, -CN, or the like.
  • substituents as described above, as for example, halogens, alkyls, alkenyls, alkynyls, hydroxyl, amino, nitro, thiol amines, imines, amides, phosphonates, phosphines, carbonyls, carboxyls, silyls
  • heterocycle or “heterocyclic group” refer to 4 to 10-membered ring structures, more preferably 5 to 7 membered rings, which ring structures include one to four heteroatoms.
  • Heterocyclic groups include pyrrolidine, oxolane, thiolane, imidazole, oxazole, piperidine. piperazine, morpholine.
  • the heterocyclic ring can be substituted at one or more positions with such substituents as described above, as for example, halogens, alkyls, alkenyls, alkynyls, hydroxyl, amino, nitro, thiol, amines, imines, amides, phosphonates, phosphines, carbonyls, carboxyls, silyls, ethers, thioethers, sulfonyls, selenoethers, ketones, aldehydes, esters, or -(CH 2 ) m -R7, -CF 3 , -CN, or the like.
  • substituents as described above, as for example, halogens, alkyls, alkenyls, alkynyls, hydroxyl, amino, nitro, thiol, amines, imines, amides, phosphonates, phosphines, carbonyls, carboxyls, si
  • polycycle or “polycyclic group” refer to two or more cyclic rings (e.g., cycloalkyls, cycloalkenyls, cycloalkynyls, aryls and/or heterocycles) in which two or more carbons are common to two adjoining rings, e.g., the rings are "fused rings". Rings that are joined through non-adjacent atoms are termed "bridged" rings.
  • Each of the rings of the polycycle can be substituted with such substituents as described above, as for example, halogens, alkyls, alkenyls, alkynyls, hydroxyl, amino, nitro, thiol, amines, imines, amides, phosphonates, phosphines, carbonyls, carboxyls, silyls, ethers, thioethers, sulfonyls, selenoethers, ketones, aldehydes, esters, or -(CH 2 ) m -R7, -CF 3 , -CN, or the like.
  • substituents as described above, as for example, halogens, alkyls, alkenyls, alkynyls, hydroxyl, amino, nitro, thiol, amines, imines, amides, phosphonates, phosphines, carbonyls, carboxyls, silyls
  • fused ring refers to a cyclic moiety which can comprise from 4 to 8 atoms in its ring structure, and can also be substituted or unsubstituted, (e.g., cycloalkyl, a cycloakenyl, an aryl, or a heterocyclic ring) that shares a pair of carbon atoms with the azepine core.
  • substituted or unsubstituted e.g., cycloalkyl, a cycloakenyl, an aryl, or a heterocyclic ring
  • the fused ring system can be a benzodiazepine, a benzoazepine, a pyrrolodiazepine, a pyrroloazepine, a furanodiazepine, a furanoazepine, a thiphenodiazepine, a thiphenoazepine, an imidazolodiazepine, an imidazoloazepine, an oxazolodiazepine, an oxazoloazepine, a thiazolodiazepine, a thiazoloazepine, a pyrazolodiazepine, a pyrazoloazepine, a pyrazinodiazepine, a pyrazinoazepine, a pyridinodiazepine, a pyridinoazepine, a pyrimidinodiazepine
  • heteroatom as used herein means an atom of any element other than carbon or hydrogen. Preferred heteroatoms are nitrogen, oxygen, sulpher and selenium.
  • amino acid residue and “peptide residue” is meant an amino acid or peptide molecule without the -OH of its carboxyl group (C-terminally linked) or the proton of its amino group (N-terminally linked).
  • the abbreviations used herein for designating the amino acids and the protective groups are based on recommendations of the IUPAC-IUB Commission on Biochemical Nomenclature (see Biochemistry (1972) 11 :1726- 1732). For instance Met, He, Leu, Ala and Gly represent "residues'Of methionine, isoleucine, leucine, alanine and glycine, respectively.
  • amino acid side chain is that part of an amino acid exclusive of the -CH(NH2)COOH portion, as defined by K. D. Kopple, "Peptides and Amino Acids”. W. A.
  • side chains of the common amino acids are -CH 2 CH 2 SCH 3 (the side chain of methionine), -CH 2 (CH 3 )-CH 2 CH 3 (the side chain of isoleucine), -CH 2 CH(CH 3 ) 2 (the side chain of leucine) or H-(the side chain of glycine).
  • amino acids used in the application of this invention are those naturally occurring amino acids found in proteins, or the naturally occurring anabolic or catabolic products of such amino acids which contain amino and carboxyl groups.
  • Particularly suitable amino acid side chains include side chains selected from those of the following amino acids: glycine, alanine, valine, cysteine, leucine, isoleucine, serine, threonine, methionine, glutamic acid, aspartic acid, glutamine, asparagine, lysine, arginine, proline, histidine, phenylalanine, tyrosine, and tryptophan.
  • amino acid residue further includes analogs, derivatives and congeners of any specific amino acid referred to herein.
  • the present invention contemplates the use of amino acid analogs wherein a side chain is lengthened or shortened while still providing a carboxyl, amino or other reactive precursor functional group for cyclization, as well as amino acid analogs having variant side chains with appropriate functional groups).
  • the subject peptidomimetic can include an amino acid analog as for example, ⁇ -cyanoalanine, canavanine, djenkolic acid, norleucine, 3- phosphoserine, homoserine, dihydroxyphenylalanine, 5-hydroxytryptophan, 1- methylhistidine, or 3-methylhistidine.
  • Other naturally occurring amino acid metabolites or precursors having side chains which are suitable herein will be recognized by those skilled in the art and are included in the scope of the present invention.
  • D and L stereoisomers of such amino acids when the structure of the amino acid admits of stereoisomeric forms.
  • the configuration of the amino acids and amino acid residues herein are designated by the appropriate symbols D, L or DL, furthermore when the configuration is not designated the amino acid or residue can have the configuration D, L or DL.
  • D, L or DL the structure of some of the compounds of this invention includes asymmetric carbon atoms.
  • isomers arising from such asymmetry are included within the scope of this invention.
  • Such isomers are obtained in substantially pure form by classical separation techniques and by sterically controlled synthesis and have arbitrarily been named, for example, as isomers #1 or #2.
  • a named amino acid shall be construed to include both the D or L stereoisomers, preferably the L stereoisomer.
  • protecting group means substituents which protect the reactive functional group from undesirable chemical reactions.
  • protecting groups include esters of carboxylic acids, ethers of alcohols and acetals and ketals of aldehydes and ketones.
  • N-terminal protecting group or "amino-protecting group” as used herein refers to various amino-protecting groups which can be employed to protect the N-terminus of an amino acid or peptide against undesirable reactions during synthetic procedures.
  • -suitable groups include acyl protecting groups such as, to illustrate, formyl, dansyl, acetyl, benzoyl, trifluoroacetyl, succinyl and methoxysuccinyl; aromatic urethane protecting groups as, for example, carbonylbenzyloxy (Cbz); and aliphatic urethane protecting groups such as t-butyloxycarbonyl (Boc) or 9-Fluorenylmethoxycarbonyl (FMOC).
  • acyl protecting groups such as, to illustrate, formyl, dansyl, acetyl, benzoyl, trifluoroacetyl, succinyl and methoxysuccinyl
  • aromatic urethane protecting groups as, for
  • Peptidomimetics of the present invention which have sidechain or azepine ring substituents which include amino groups -such as where R3 is a lysine or arginine, or where R 8 , R j , R 2 or Y comprise a free amino group- can optionally comprise suitable N-terminal protecting groups attached to the sidechains.
  • C-terminal protecting group or “carboxyl-protecting group” as used herein refers to those groups intended to protect a carboxylic acid group, such as the C- terminus of an amino acid or peptide or an acidic or hydroxyl azepine ring substituent, against undesirable reactions during synthetic procedures and includes.
  • Benzyl or other suitable esters or ethers are illustrative of C-terminal protecting groups known in the art.
  • phosphotyrosine and "phosphotyrosine analog”, for ease of reading, appear interchangably as a portion of the formula representing the subject peptidomimetics. As used herein, with respect to the appearance in a formula for the present compounds, either term is intended to encompass any phosphotyrosine analog of the general formula:
  • Y is a phosphate group or phosphate analog which can occur in one of the ortho, meta or para positions, though the most preferable is the para.
  • Y is a non-hydrolyzable phosphate analog which is stable under normal physiological conditions.
  • Exemplary choices for the phosphate analog Y include phenylalanine ring substituents represented by the genereal formulas
  • R 15 and R j g each independently represent hydrogen, a lower alkyl, or a pharmeceutically acceptable salt, or R 1 5 and R j g taken together with the O-P-O, O-B-O, O-V-O, or O-As-O atoms to which they are attached complete a heterocyclic ring having from 5 to 8 atoms in the ring structure.
  • R j 5 and R j g are capable of being hydrolysed to a hydroxyl group, particularly in aqueous solution at physiological pH.
  • Protein-protein interactions are involved in all stages of the intracellular signal transduction process -at the plasma membrane, where the signal is initiated in the cytoplasm by receptor recruitment of other cellular proteins; in the cytoplasm, where the signals are disseminated to different cellular locations; and in the nucleus, where other proteins involved in transcriptional control form complexes to regulate transcription of particular genes.
  • Accumulating evidence suggests that selected sequences surrounding tyrosine phosphorylation sites can be recognized by proteins containing 5rc-homology 2 (SH2) domains, and that such phosphotyrosine recognition functions to propagate intracellular signals by mediating the formation and/or dissolution of protein complexes.
  • SH2 domain-containing proteins is thought to derive its specificity from the presence of a phosphorylated tyrosine as well as from the surounding amino acid sequence.
  • the present invention makes available novel compounds useful for binding to and SH2 domain, and/or inhibiting an interaction between a protein containing an SH2 domain and a phophotyrosine-containing polypeptide.
  • the subject peptidomimetic is represented by the general formula ⁇ -amino-N-[l-(2-AA-2-oxoethyl)-l- azepin-3-yl]-PTyr (Formula I), wherein PTyr represents a phosphotyrosine or a phosphotyrosine analog which is carboxy-terminally linked with a 3-amino moiety of the azepine, and AA represents a peptide or single amino acid residue amino-terminally linked through a peptide bond with the 2-oxoethyl moiety of the azepine.
  • azepine core mimics a dipeptidyl amide backbone
  • the PTyr, the azepine, and the AA together form a peptidyl analog of the general formula PTyr-Xaa-Xaa-AA.
  • PTyr can further include an additional amino acid residue or peptide, or similar azepine moiety, linked in a peptidyl bond to the N-terminus of the phosphotyrosine in order to further extend the peptidomimetic amino terminally.
  • the peptidyl-azepine is represented by (Formula II):
  • A represents a fused ring selected from a group consisting of a cycloalkyl, a cycloakenyl, an aryl, and a heterocyclic ring, wherein the fused ring A can comprise from 4 to 8 atoms in its ring structure;
  • R ] represents hydrogen, a halogen, a lower alkyl, a lower alkenyl, a lower alkynyl, a carboxyl, an azido, -(CH 2 ) m -R 7 , -(CH 2 ) m -OH, -(CH 2 ) m -O-lower alkyl, -(CH 2 ) m -O-lower alkenyl, -(CH 2 ) n -O-(CH 2 ) m -R 7 , -(CH 2 ) m -SH, -(CH 2 ) m -S-lower alkyl, -(CH 2 ) m -S-lower alkenyl, -(CH 2 ) n -S-(CH 2 ) m -R 7 ,
  • R represents an electron lone pair, hydrogen, an lower alkyl, an lower alkenyl, an lower alkynyl, a carboxyl, -(CH 2 ) m -R 7 , -(CH 2 ) m -OH, -(CH 2 ) m -O-lower alkyl, -(CH 2 ) m -O- lower alkenyl, -(CH 2 ) n -O-(CH 2 ) m -R 7 , -(CH 2 ) p -SH, -(CH 2 ) p -S-lower alkyl, -(CH 2 ) p -S-lower alkenyl, -(CH 2 ) p -S-(CH 2 ) m -R 7 , — (CH 2 ) - N
  • R 3 represents an N-terminally linked amino acid residue or peptide
  • R and R 5 each independently represent hydrogen, lower alkyl, lower alkenyl, -(CH 2 ) m -R 7 , -C(O)-lower alkyl, -C(O)-lower alkenyl, -C(O)-(CH 2 ) m -R 7 , or R 4 and R 5 taken together with the N atom to which they are attached complete a heterocyclic ring having from 4 to 8 atoms in the ring structure;
  • R 6 represents hydrogen, a lower alkyl, a lower alkenyl, R 7 , -(CH 2 ) p -R 7 , or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt forming ion;
  • R 7 represents an aryl, a cycloalkyl, a cycloakenyl, or a heterocycle
  • R 8 represents hydrogen, a halogen, a lower alkyl, a lower alkenyl, a lower alkynyl, a carboxyl, an azido, -(CH 2 ) m -R 7 , -(CH 2 ) m -OH, -(CH 2 ) m -O-lower alkyl, -(CH 2 ) m -O-lower alkenyl, -(CH 2 ) n -O-(CH 2 ) m -R 7 , -(CH 2 ) m -SH, -(CH 2 ) m -S-lower alkyl, -(CH 2 ) m -S-lower alkeny
  • R9 is absent, hydrogen, or a lower alkyl
  • R j 3 represents hydrogen, or a lower alkyl
  • Rl4 is absent or represents one or more substitutions with a halogen, a lower alkyl, a lower alkoxy, a lower alkylthio, -NO . -CF3, -CN, and -OH;
  • Rj 7 is absent or represents a C-terminally linked amino acid residue or peptide;
  • X represents O or S;
  • Y represents hydrogen, a lower alkyl, -(CH 2 ) m -OH, -(CH 2 ) m -O- lower alkyl, a carboxyl, an amine, an amide, a nitrosyl, a sulfhydryl, a sulfonyl, or a sulfonamide;
  • Z represents C or N
  • P-Tyr represents a phosphotyrosine, or a phosphotyrosine analog, the carboxyl group of said phosphotyrosine being linked by an amide bond to the 3-amino group of said azepine; and n is zero or an integer in the range of 1 to 6; m is zero or an integer in the range of 1 to 6; and p is an integer in the range of 1 to 6.
  • the subject peptidomimetic can be tethered to form polymers, preferably homodimers or heterodimers. Such molecules can be useful to, for example, bring two or more SH2 containing proteins into proximity.
  • the specificity of the peptidomimetic can be increased in a manner analogous to antibody avidity, by virtue of its ability to bind two SH2 domains on the same protein, be they similar or dissimilar in specificity.
  • the tethers can be formed, as for instance, any one of the sidechains Rj, R 2 , R 8 , R 9 , or Rj 4 being a covalent bridge between two or more azepine cores.
  • substitutions of the azepines can provide a cross-linking agent for covalently or non-covalently immobilizing the mimetic on an insoluble matrix, e.g., to purify SH2 proteins.
  • the mimetic can also provide a detectable label, such as radiolabel or fluorogenic label, or biotin, streptavidin or the like, for detecting the presence of the mimetic.
  • each expression e.g. lower alkyl, m, n, p, etc., when it occurs more than once in any structure, is intended to be independent of its definition elsewhere in the same structure.
  • the fused ring A is selected from a group consisting of benzene, pyrrole, furan, thiphene, imidazole, oxazole, thiazole, triazole, pyrazole, pyrroine, pyridine. pyrazine, pyridazine and pyrimidine, and the like.
  • the fused ring A can be substituted, for example, by any of a halogen, a lower alkyl, a lower alkoxy, a lower alkylthio. -NO , -CF 3 , -CN, and -OH.
  • substituents such as a halogen or a nitro group
  • A is a benzyl ring
  • substituents are generally required for sedative-hypnotic activity in other benzodiazpines, such as daizepam or nitrazepam.
  • R j is particularly selected from a group consisting of -(CH 2 ) m -benzyl, -(CH 2 ) n -S-(CH 2 ) m -benzyl, -(CH 2 ) n -O-(CH 2 ) m -benzyl, -(CH 2 ) m -pyridyl, -(CH 2 ) n -S-(CH 2 ) m -pyridyl, and -(CH 2 ) ⁇ -O-(CH 2 ) m -pyridyl.
  • each of the benzyl and pyridyl moieties can be substituted at one or more positions with a halogen, a lower alkyl, a lower alkoxy, a lower alkylthio, -NO 2 , -CF 3 , -CN, and -OH.
  • R ] as well as the other substituents of the azepine peptidomimetic, can effect the solubulity, as well as membrane partioning of the subject peptidomimetics.
  • pyridyl containing R j substituents can exhibit a greater water solubility than the analogous benzyl-substituted azepines.
  • R3 can be an amino acid selected from a group consisting of leucine, isoleucine, methionine, proline, valine, aspartic acid, and asparagine.
  • These exemplary peptidomimetic agents can be used to inhibit the phosphotyrosine binding of such SH2 domain-containing proteins as Src, Lck, Fps, phosphatidylinositol-3-kinases, ras GTPase-activating protein, Fyn, Lyk, Fgr, Fes, ZAP-70, Abl, Crk, Nek, Sem-5, p85, phospholipase C, SHPTP1, SHPTP2, corkscrew, Syk, Lyn, Yes, Hck, Dsrc, Tec, Atk/Bpk, Itk/Tsk, Arg, Csk, tensin, Vav, She, Emt, Grb2, Syp, Blk, Bpk,
  • the peptidomimetic of the present invention is a benzodiazepine represented by the general formula (formula III):
  • Rj represents hydrogen, a halogen, a lower alkyl, a lower alkenyl, a lower alkynyl, a carboxyl, an azido, -(CH 2 ) m -R 7 , -(CH 2 ) m -OH, -(CH 2 ) m -O-lower alkyl, -(CH 2 ) m -O-lower alkenyl, -(CH 2 ) n -O-(CH 2 ) m -R 7 , -(CH 2 ) m -SH, -(CH 2 ) m -S-lower alkyl, -(CH 2 ) m -S-lower alkenyl, -(CH 2 ) n -S-(CH 2 ) m -R 7 ,
  • R and R 5 each independently represent hydrogen, lower alkyl, lower alkenyl, -(CH 2 ) m -R 7 , -C(O)-lower alkyl, -C(O)-lower alkenyl, -C(O)-(CH 2 ) m -R 7 , or R4 and 5 taken together with the N atom to which they are attached complete a heterocyclic ring having from 4 to 8 atoms in the ring structure;
  • Rg represents hydrogen, a lower alkyl, an lower alkenyl, -(CH 2 ) m -R 7 , or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt forming ion;
  • R 7 represents an aryl, a cycloalkyl, a cycloakenyl, or a heterocycle
  • Rg represents hydrogen, a halogen, a lower alkyl, a lower alkenyl, a lower alkynyl, a carboxyl, an azido, -(CH 2 ) m -R 7 , -(CH 2 ) m -OH, -(CH 2 ) m -O-lower alkyl, -(CH 2 ) m -O-lower alkenyl, -(CH 2 ) n -O-(CH 2 ) m -R 7 , -(CH 2 ) m -SH, -(CH 2 ) m -S-lower alkyl, -(CH 2 ) m -S-lower alkenyl, -(CH 2 ) n -S-(CH 2 ) m -R 7 ,
  • R j O represents an alpha-carbon sidechain of an amino acid residue or analog thereof
  • R j 1 represents COOH or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, or a carboxy- terminal blocking group
  • R ]2 represents NH 2 or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, an amino-terminal blocking group, or -NH-R ⁇ 7 ;
  • R j4 represents one or more substituent selected from the group consisting of a halogen, a lower alkyl, a lower alkoxy, a lower alkylthio, -NO 2 , -CF3, -CN, and -OH;
  • R 17 represents a C-terminally linked amino acid residue or peptide;
  • Y represents a phosphate or phosphate analog
  • X j represents O or S;
  • X 2 represents hydrogen, a lower alkyl, -(CH ) m -OH, -(CH 2 ) m - O-lower alkyl, a carboxyl, an amine, an amide, a nitrosyl, a sulfhydryl, a sulfonyl, or a sulfonamide;
  • n is zero or an integer in the range of 1 to 6;
  • m is zero or an integer in the range of 1 to 6; and
  • p is an integer in the range of 1 to 6.
  • the peptidomimetic can be a 5-benzyl substituted 1 ,4-diazepine represented by the general formula (formula IV):
  • Rg represents hydrogen or an alpha-carbon sidechain of an amino acid residue or amino acid analog
  • RJ Q represents an alpha-carbon sidechain of an amino acid residue or amino acid analog
  • R ] j represents COOH or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, or a carboxy-terminal blocking group
  • R j2 represents NH 2 or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, or an amino-terminal blocking group
  • Y represents a phosphate or phosphate analog.
  • the subject compound is represented by one of the following formulas:
  • certain peptidomimetics of the present invention may exist in particular geometric or stereoisomeric forms.
  • the present invention contemplates all such compounds, including cis- and trans-isomers, R- and S-enantiomers, diastereomers, d- isomers, 1 -isomers, the racemic mixtures thereof, and other mixtures thereof, as falling within the scope of the invention.
  • Additional asymmetric carbon atoms may be present in a substituent such as an alkyl group. All such isomers, as well as mixtures thereof, are intended to be included in this invention.
  • a particular enantiomer of a compound of the present invention may be prepared by asymmetric synthesis, or by derivation with a chiral auxiliary, where the resulting diastereomeric mixture is separated and the auxiliary group cleaved to provide the pure desired enantiomer.
  • the molecule contains a basic functional group, such as amino, or an acidic functional group, such as carboxyl, diastereomeric salts are formed with an appropriate optically-active acid or base, followed by resolution of the diastereomers thus formed by fractional crystallization or chromatographic means well known in the art, and subsequent recovery of the pure enantiomers.
  • the pharmaceutical acceptable salts of the subject peptidomimetics include the conventional nontoxic salts or quaternary ammonium salts of the compounds, e.g., from non ⁇ toxic organic or inorganic acids.
  • such convential nontoxic salts include those derived from inorganic acids such as hydrochloride, hydrobromic, sulfuric, sulfamic, phosphoric, nitric, and the like; and the salts prepared from organic acids such as acetic, propionic, succinic, glycolic, stearic, lactic, malic, tartaric, citric, ascorbic, pamoic, maleic, hydroxymaleic, phenylacetic, glutamic, benzoic, salicyclic, sulfanilic, 2-acetoxybenzoic, fumaric, toluenesulfonic, methanesulfonic, ethane disulfonic, oxalic, isethionic, and the like.
  • the pharmaceutically acceptable salts of the present invention can be synthesized from the subject peptidomimetic which contain a basic or acid moiety by conventional chemical methods. Generally, the salts are prepared by reacting the free base or acid with stoichiometric amounts or with an excess of the desired salt-forming inorganic or organic acid or base in a suitable solvent.
  • the pharmaceutically acceptable salts of the acids of the subject peptidomimtrics are also readily prepared by conventional procedures such as treating an acid of Formula I with an appropriate amount of a basem such as an alkali or alkaline earth methal hydroxide (e.g.
  • an organic base such as an amine, piperidine, pyrrolodine, benzylamine and the like, or a quaternary ammonium hydroxide sauch as tetramethylammonium hydroxide and the like.
  • Contemplated equivalents of the compounds described in Formula I include compounds which otherwise correspond thereto, and which have the same general properties thereof (e.g. the ability to inhibit an SH2-phosphotyrosine interaction), wherein one or more simple variations of substituents are made which do not adversely affect the efficacy of the compound in inhibiting the interaction of an SH2 domain with a phosphotyrosine-containing polypeptide.
  • the peptidomimetics of the present invention may be prepared by the methods illustrated in the general reaction schemes shown in Figures 1-5, or by modifications thereof, using readily available starting materials, reagents and conventional synthesis procedures. In these reactions, it is also possible to make use of variants which are in themselves known, but are not mentioned here.
  • a 2-aminocyclic ketone shown generally as compound 1 in Figure 1A, is used to generate the fused-ring diazepine core of the present peptide analogs.
  • Figure 1A illustrates the coupling of an amino acid analog to the 2-amino group of 5 by conventional peptide coupling techniques.
  • the aminocyclic ketone is coupled to an N-protected amino acid 9A (such as a Boc-glycine or Boc-alanine) using dicyclohexylcarbodiimide (DCC) or other conventional peptide coupling reagent (method A).
  • DCC dicyclohexylcarbodiimide
  • the product 8 is N-deprotected by treatment with acid, preferably anhydrous HC1 in ethyl acetate in instances wherein the protecting group is a BOC protecting group, to give the ⁇ - aminoacyl derivative 7 of the aminocyclic ketone.
  • acid preferably anhydrous HC1 in ethyl acetate in instances wherein the protecting group is a BOC protecting group
  • An another route to synthesize 7 involves the basic synthetic approach (method B) of treating the ketone 5 with the amino acid chloride hydrochloride 9_B, prepared from the amino acid with, for instance, PCl 5 -AcCl.
  • compound ⁇ can be obtained by heating the ketone 5 with the amino acid ester 2C, such as alanine or glycine methyl ester hydrochloride, in refluxing pyridine (method C; c.f. Evans et al. (1987) J Med Chem 30:1229-1239; and Stembach et al. (1962) J Org Chem 27:3788).
  • amino acid ester 2C such as alanine or glycine methyl ester hydrochloride
  • R Q X -CH(-R 8 )-C(O)-R 3 , or -CH(- Rg)-CO tBu
  • R 9 MgX ; R 9 a lower alkyl), such as methylmagnesium iodide, to produce a disubstituted C 5 .
  • Compound H can subsequently be alkylated on N by treatment with an alkyl halide (e.g. R 2 X) or dialkyl sulfate.
  • the 4,5-dihydro compounds can be acylated on N 4 by treatment with acyl halides or anhydrides, preferably in the presence of base such as triethylamine.
  • the 2-thione 12 can be prepared from the parent amide (e.g., any of compounds 6, 10, or 11) by treatment with P 2 S5 or Lawesson's reagent (2,4-Bis-(4-methoxyphenyl)-2,4- dithioxo-l,3,2,4-dithiadi-phosphetane) according to published procedures (Scheibye et al. (1973) Bull Soc Chim Belg. 87:229). Desulfurization over Raney nickel of the thione 12 can be used to prepare the 2-unsubstituted diazepine H.
  • P 2 S5 or Lawesson's reagent 2,4-Bis-(4-methoxyphenyl)-2,4- dithioxo-l,3,2,4-dithiadi-phosphetane
  • the latter may be alkylated with alkyl halide or sulfate, acylated with acylhalide or an hydride, reduced with sodium cyanoborohydride, or substituted with alkylmagnesium halide as described for 6 above.
  • substitutions at C 2 can be carried out, for example, by treatment of the 2- thione Y2 with an alcohol or an amine in solvent, preferably tetrahydrofuran, in the presence of a mercury salt, such as mercuric chloride or mercuric acetate, to produce the 2-substituted diazepine 18 ( Figure 1C).
  • the 2-thione 12 can be converted to the thioiminoether 12 with an alkylating agent, preferably a lower alkyl halide or cycloalkyl halide, at room temperature under phase transfer conditions requiring aqueous base (such as an alkali earth hydroxide), an organic solvent immiscible with water (e.g.
  • the thioiminoether 19 can, in turn, be transformed to the 2-substituted compound 1 by reaction with an amine or alcohol for 2- 96 hours, such as in a sealed pressure vessel at 80-250°C.
  • the 3 -amino substituted diazepine 16. can be prepared by well known procedures.
  • Figure IB illustrates that the 3 -unsubstituted diazepine 1Q (R-H) can be treated with a suitable base, such as potassium t-butoxide (K-tBu), followed by a nitrosylating agent, such as isoamyl nitrate, to yield the oxime 15.
  • a suitable base such as potassium t-butoxide (K-tBu)
  • K-tBu potassium t-butoxide
  • a nitrosylating agent such as isoamyl nitrate
  • Reduction of the oxime such as by treatment with Raney nickel, produces the 3 -amino diazepine 16.
  • Other exemplary methods for generating the 3-amino derivatives are described below with reference to Figures 2B and C, and Figure 3.
  • the 3-amino substituted diazepine 16 can be derivatized with a phosphotyrosine or phosphotyrosine analog (collectively referred to hereinafter as "pTyr") to yield the 3-amide substituted compound 17.
  • pTyr phosphotyrosine or phosphotyrosine analog
  • the diazepine 16 can be alkylated by treatment with a pTyr halide 2 OB.
  • the 3- amino 16 can be reacted with an N-protected phosphotyrosine 20A and a coupling reagent such as DCC, EDC, or isobutyl chloroformate.
  • the synthesis of the subject peptidomimetic can be accomplished by the cyclization of an ⁇ -aminoglycine and a 2-amino benzophenone.
  • the synthesis of ⁇ -isopropylthio-N-benzyloxy- carbonylglycine can be obtained in two steps from glyoxic acid, benzyl carbamate, and 2- propanethiol according to the methods described by Zoller et al. (1975) Tetrahedron 31:863.
  • the protected ⁇ -aminoglycine synthon 22B thus formed can be converted to the corresponding mixed anhydride with an alkyl chloroformate in the presence of a tertiary amine, and reacted in situ with a 2-aminocyclic ketone to yield a 1,4-diazepine.
  • the aminoglycine 22B is dissolved in an aprotic solvent such as methylene chloride (CH 2 C1 2 ) and the resulting solution cooled to about 0°C.
  • This solution is then mixed with an equimolar amount of N-methylmorpholine (NMM) and a similar amount of alky isobutyl chloroformate (iBuOCOCl), and the reaction mixture maitained at a temperature of 0°C for approximately 15 minutes.
  • NMM N-methylmorpholine
  • iBuOCOCl alky isobutyl chloroformate
  • the reaction mixture is then allowed to warm to 25°C, and is stirred for about 18 hours at that temperature or heated up to about 55°C for 2.5 hours to insure complete acylation reactions.
  • This crude reaction mixture is then washed with aqueous citric acid, aqueous sodium bicarbonate solution and brine and after drying, the solvent removed by evaporation under reduced pressure, leaving the acylated product 24.
  • the thioether substituent of 24 is first replaced with an amino group by treatment with excess ammonia in the presence of added mercury or silver salts to form intermediate 25.
  • the solvent and salts are removed and the crude reaction product is cyclized in acetic acid containing ammonium acetate to produce the benzodiazepine 26.
  • the thioether 24 is dissolved in tetrahydrofuran (THF) or other solvent inert under the reaction conditions and solution saturated with ammonia gas.
  • THF tetrahydrofuran
  • a slight molar excess of mecuric chloride is added and a stream of ammonia gas passed into the reaction mixture for a period of 1 -5 hours under ambient temperatures (e.g.
  • ester 26 is alkylated at N j by treatment with sodium hydride and a halogenated alkyl ester, such as bromoethyl ethyl ester, in DMF, to form the 1 -substituted ester 22. Subsequently, the ester can be saponified to yield the free carboxylic acid 22, which is then derivatized with an amino acid residue or peptide utilizing conventional peptide synthesis methods (see, for example, Barney and Merrifield, in The Peptides, E. Gross and J. Meienhofer, Eds. (Academic Press, New York, 1980), Vol. 2, pp. 1-284).
  • the carboxyl intermediate 22 can be reacted with a c-protected isoleucine (e.g. isoleucine methyl ester) and a coupling reagent (isobutyl chloroformate) in NMM, to yield the 1 -(2-isoleucinyl-2-oxoethyl)-diazepine 10.
  • a c-protected isoleucine e.g. isoleucine methyl ester
  • a coupling reagent isobutyl chloroformate
  • the diazepine 30 can be coupled with a phosphotyrosine analog, or a peptide having a carboxyl phosphotyrosine analog residue, utilizing standard peptide coupling protocols.
  • the deprotection of the 3-amino moiety of 0 by removal of the benzyloxycarbonyl protecting group can be carried out under transfer hydrogenation conditions in methanol-aqueous formic acid to yield a formate salt of 10.
  • the free amine 31 can be isolated after neutralization of the salt with sodium carbonate solution (10%) in ethyl acetate, and subsequently reacted with the N-protected (FMOC) phosphotyrosine analog in the presence of isobutyl chloroformate and N-methylmorpholine in tetrahydroturin, to yield the N-[2,3-dihydro-l-(2-methionyl-2-oxoethyl)-l ,4-azepin-3-yl-2-one]-phosphotyrosine 12-
  • Figure 2C illustrates that the 3 -amino moiety can be modified, such as by addition of a lower alkyl group (e.g. methyl).
  • a lower alkyl group e.g. methyl
  • the CBZ-protected amino moiety of the 22 can be methylated by treatment with sodium hydride and iodomethane in DMF to afford the 3-methyamine 28.
  • a synthetic approach useful in obtaining the present peptidomimetics comprises the multistep sequence shown in Figure 3.
  • This overall synthetic sequence is adequate for initial small-scale synthesis of a wide range of diazepines in order to investigate the inhibitory activity of a number of variants of a series of diazepine core structures in a high throughput screen as described below.
  • the iodoacetamide derivative 42 can be obtained by treatment with chloroacetyl chloride, followed by sodium iodide in acetone (Stembach et al. (1962) J. Org. Chem. 27:3788).
  • Treatment of 42 with ammonium hydroxide produces the intermediate 43, which can be cyclized by, for example, heating, to produce the diazepine core structure 44 (Bell et al. (1964) J. Hetrocyl. Chem 4:647; Hirai et al. (1980) J. Med. Chem. 24:20; and Bock et al. U.S. Patent No. 4,628,084).
  • the 3-chloro-substituted diazepine 42 can subsequently be obtained from the 3 -unsubstituted diazepine 44 by treatment with dimethyl ether, followed by base, followed by SOCl 2 (Bell et al. (1962) J. Org. Chem.
  • the appropriate ortho-substituted aryl or heterocyclic ring 5 . 5 can be derivatized with a protected triflate 56 derived from an amino acid, followed by saponification and cyclization to form the 1 ,5-disubstituted 1 -azepine 5_8.
  • the azepine ring in similar fashion to the diazepine ring, can be converted to the 3 -amino substituted form 52, which is subsequently used to generate the present peptidomimetics as described above.
  • the 3-amino azepine 52 can be reacted with an N-protected phosphotyrosine (or analog thereof) and a peptide coupling reagent such as DCC or EDC, to yield the 3-amino-PTyr azepine 60.
  • a peptide coupling reagent such as DCC or EDC
  • phosphotyrosine analogs can be useful for generating the present peptidominetics.
  • the phosphotyrosine analog is a non-hydrolyzable analog.
  • Figures 5A-C illustrate the synthesis of a 4-boronophenylalanine which can be utilized to generate a boronic acid analog of phosphotyrosine. Briefly, ethylene glycol is added to diisopropyl dichloromethaneboronate 65 dissolved in THF, stored for 3 days at room temperature, and subsequently fractionally distilled to yield the 2-dichloromethyl-2-bora- 1,3-dioxacyclopentane 66.
  • Tri-n-butyltin hydride is added to a solution of 66 in dry benzene.
  • a catalytic amount of 2,2'-azobis-(2- methylpropionitrile) is introduced and the resulting solution is stirred for 24 hours at room temperature.
  • Fractional distillation of the resulting solution yields the 2-chloromethyl-2- bora-l,3-dioxacyclopentane ( ⁇ L, which can be converted to the 2-iodomethyl compound 6j£ by addition of sodium iodide to a solution of 62 in dry acetone and refluxing for 48 hours.
  • Figure 5B illustrates another embodiment of an activated boronate for synthesizing a boronic acid analog of tyrosine.
  • dichloromethaneboronic acid 21 (Rathke et al. (1976) J. Organometal Chem. 122:145) is dissolved in benzene along with pinacol 6H 2 0.
  • the resulting biphasic mixture is then heated to reflux under an argon atmosphere, utilizing a Dean-Spark trap to remove water as a azeotrope.
  • the resulting solution is fractionally distilled to yield the 4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-2-dichloromethyl-2-bora-l,3- cyclopentane 22-
  • the 2-chloromethyl 21 can be generated, and, in similar fashion as described above, can be subsequently converted to the 4,4,5,5- tetramethyl-2-iodomethyl-2-bora-l,3-cyclopentane 24 for use in synthesizing a boronate pinacol analog of phosphotyrosine.
  • Figure 5C illustrates a general preparation scheme for condensing boronyl esters such as 68 and 25 with a halogen-activated phenylalanine, such as 4-chlorophenylalanine 69.
  • a typical reaction scheme would comprise first activating zinc dust with dibromomethane (under an argon atmosphere), followed by dropwise addition of a THF solution containing the boronyl ester while stirring at 25°C for approximately 0.5 to 2 hours. The zinc dust is then decanted and transferred to a solution made of copper cyanide, lithium chloride, and THF. The resulting copper derivatives are then reacted with the acyl halide 62 to generate the boronate 70. which can be utilized in the synthesis of the subject peptidomimetics.
  • the peptidomimetics of the present invention can be rapidly screened in high throughput assays in order to identify potential lead compounds for inhibiting the ability of a particular SH2 domain to bind a phosphotyrosine-containing polypeptide.
  • the basic strategy of the "two-hybrid" assay can be employed to rapidly screen the compounds of the present invention.
  • the N-terminal domain of GAL4 (or other similar protein), which binds to specfic DNA sequences (UAS Q ), is used to generate a fusion protein (GAL4-DB/SH2) with at least an SH2-domain containing portion of a protein.
  • GAL4-DB/SH2 a fusion protein with at least an SH2-domain containing portion of a protein.
  • the C-terminal domain of GAL4, which is necessary to activate transcription by GAL4 is used to create a fusion protein (GAL4- AD/target) with a phosphotyrosine-containing polypeptide target of the SH2 domain of interest.
  • UAS G sequence can be utilized to generate a reporter gene construct, such as a luciferase gene construct, which is then used to transfect host cells. Expression of the reporter gene thus reguires the presence of the reconstituted GAL4 domains.
  • boronophenylalanine is represented by the general formula (Formula V):
  • Y' represents a substitution at one of the meta, ortho or para positions of the phenyl moiety, Y' being a borono given by the general formula
  • R j5 and R 16 each independently represent hydrogen, a lower alkyl, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, or Rj 5 and Rjg taken together with the O-B-O atoms to which they are attached complete a heterocyclic ring having from 5 to 8 atoms in the ring structure;
  • R'l 4 is absent or represents one or more substituents at remaining ring positions, which substituents are selected from halogens, lower alkyls, lower alkoxys, a hydroxyl, amino, nitro, thiol, amines, imines, amides, carbonyls, carboxyls, silyls, ethers, thioethers, sulfonyls, selenoethers, ketones, aldehydes, esters, or -(CH 2 ) m -R 7 , -CF3, -CN, or the like;
  • X 8 and X9 each, independently, represent a methylene, an ethylene, an acetylene, an amine, a carbonyl, a phosphonyl, a sulfer, an oxygen, or a selenium;
  • R' 17 is absent, or represents hydrogen, halogens, alkyls, alkenyls, alkynyls, hydroxyl, amino, nitro, thiol, amines, imines, amides, phosphoryls, phosphonates, phosphines, carbonyls, carboxyls, silyls, ethers, thioethers, sulfonyls, selenoethers, ketones, aldehydes, esters, or -(CH 2 ) m -R 7 or R' 17 represents an amino acid residue or peptide condensed with X 8 ;
  • R'3 is absent, or represents hydrogen, halogens, alkyls, alkenyls, alkynyls, hydroxyl, amino, nitro, thiol, amines, imines, amides, phosphoryls, phosphonates, phosphines, carbonyls, carboxyls, silyl
  • R7 represents an aryl, a cycloalkyl, a cycloalkenyl, a heterocycle or a polycycle; m is zero or an integer in the range of 1 to 8; and n is 1, 2-or 3.
  • substitutions of formula V can chosen so as to provide a cross-linking agent for covalently or non-covalently immobilizing the mimetic on an insoluble matrix, e.g., to purify SH2 proteins, tyrosine kinases, tyrosine phosphatase, etc..
  • the substituents can also provide a detectable label, such as radiolabel or fluorogenic label, or biotin, streptavidin or the like, for detecting the presence of the mimetic.
  • the compound of formula V is provided as a peptide or peptide analog which is equivalent in size to a dipeptide or larger, e.g., the compound is a peptide of peptide analog of 2 or greated amino acids or amino acid analogs.
  • length of the peptide or peptide analog is in the range of 2 to 30 amino acid residues, more preferably from 2 to 20 or 4 to 20 residues in length, and even more preferably from 4 to 10 residues in length.
  • non-hydrolyzable peptide analogs can be generated which incoporate the compound of formula V.
  • peptide analogs of the present invention can be generated using, in addition to the benzodiazepines described above, substituted gama lactam rings (Garvey et al. in Peptides: Chemistry and Biology, G.R. Marshall ed., ESCOM Publisher: Leiden, Netherlands, 1988, pl23), C-7 mimics (Huffman et al. in Peptides: Chemistry and Biologyy, G.R. Marshall ed., ESCOM Publisher: Leiden, Netherlands, 1988, p. 105), keto-methylene pseudopeptides (Ewenson et al.
  • the peptidomimetic can be derived as a retro-inverso analog of the peptide.
  • the boronoF-EEI peptide can be generated as the retro- inverso analog:
  • retro-inverso analogs can be made according to the methods known in the art, such as that described by the Sisto et al. U.S. Patent 4,522,752.
  • the illustrated retro-inverso analog can be generated as follows.
  • the geminal diamine corresponding to the boronophenylalanine analog is synthesized by treating a borono-protected (e.g.
  • the Fmoc (fluorenylmethoxycarbonyl) group is removed with piperidine in dimethylformamide, and the resulting amine is trimethylsilylated with bistrimethylsilylacetamide (BSA) before condensation with suitably alkylated, side ⁇ chain protected derivative of Meldrum's acid, as described in U.S. Patent 5,061,811 to Pinori et al., to yield the retro-inverso tripeptide analog.
  • the pseudotripeptide is then coupled with L-Ile under standard conditions to give the protected tetrapeptide analog.
  • the protecting groups are removed to release the final product, which is purified by HPLC.
  • the peptidomimetic can be derived as a retro- enatio analog of the peptide, such as the exemplary retro-enatio peptide analog:
  • Retro-enantio analogs such as this can be synthesized using D-enatiomers of the subject borono-analogs and commercially available D-amino acids and standard solid- or solution-phase peptide-synthesis techniques.
  • a suitably amino-protected (t-butyloxycarbonyl, Boc) D- boronophenylalanine residue is covalently bound to a solid support such as chloromethyl resin.
  • the boronyl can be protected, for example, as described in the examples below.
  • the resin is washed with dichloromethane (DCM), and the BOC protecting group removed by treatment with TFA in DCM.
  • the resin is washed and neutralized, and the next Boc- protected D-amino acid (D-Glu; the side -chain carboxylate is protected as, for example, the benzyl ester) is introduced by coupling with diisopropylcarbodiimide.
  • the resin is again washed, and the cycle repeated for each of the remaining amino acids in turn (D-Glu, D-Met).
  • the protecting groups are removed and the peptide cleaved from the solid support by treatment with hydrofluoric acid/anisole/dimethyl sulfide/thioanisole.
  • the final product is purified by HPLC to yield the pure retro-enantio analog.
  • trans-olefin derivatives can be made with the subject boronophenylalanine analogs.
  • an exemplary olefin analog is:
  • the trans olefin analog of a boronophenylalanine containing peptide can be synthesized according to the method of Y.K. Shue et al. (1987) Tetrahedron Letters 28:3225, which scheme is shown in Figure 8.
  • Boc-amino, side-chain-protected (as, for example, the 2-adamantanyl ester) L-glutamic acid derivative is converted to the corresponding ⁇ -amino aldehyde, which is treated with a vinylcuprate to yield a diastereomeric mixture of alcohols 215. which are carried on together.
  • the allylic alcohol is acetylated with acetic anhydride in pyridine, and the olefin is cleaved with osmium tetroxide/sodium periodate to yield the aldehyde, which is condensed with the Wittig reagent derived from a protected glutarate precursor, to yield the allylic acetate.
  • the allylic acetate 216 is selectively hydrolyzed with sodium carbonate in methanol, and the allylic alcohol is treated with triphenylphosphine and carbon tetrabromide to yield the allylic bromide 215.
  • This compound is reduced with zinc in acetic acid to give the transposed trans olefin 218 as a mixture of diastereomers at the newly-formed center.
  • the diastereomers are separated and the pseudodipeptide 219 is obtained by selective transfer hydrogenolysis to unveil the free carboxylic acid.
  • the pseudodipeptide is then coupled at the C-terminus with a suitably protected He residue, and at the N-terminus with the protected boronophneylalanine residue, by standard techniques, to yield the protected tetrapeptide isostere.
  • the protecting groups are then removed with strong acid to yield the desired peptide analog, which can be further purified by HPLC.
  • pseudodipeptides synthesized by the above method to other pseudodipeptides, to make peptide analogs with several olefinic functionalities in place of amide functionalities.
  • pseudodipeptides corresponding to pTyr-Glu and Glu- Ile could be made and then coupled together by standard techniques to yield an analog of the tetrapeptide pYEEI which has two olefinic bonds between residues.
  • Still another class of peptidomimetic boronophenylalanine derivatives include the phosphonate derivatives, such as:
  • the present invention provides pharmaceutically acceptable compositions which comprise a therapeutically-effective amount of one or more of the compounds described above, formulated together with one or more pharmaceutically acceptable carriers (additives) and/or diluents.
  • the pharmaceutical compositions of the present invention may be specially formulated for administration in solid or liquid form, including those adapted for the following: (1) oral administration, for example, drenches (aqueous or non-aqueous solutions or suspensions), tablets, boluses, powders, granules, pastes for application to the tongue; (2) parenteral administration, for example, by subcutaneous, intramuscular or intravenous injection as, for example, a sterile solution or suspension; (3) topical application, for example, as a cream, ointment or spray applied to the skin; or (4) intravaginally or intravectally, for example, as a pessary, cream or foam.
  • terapéuticaally-effective amount means that amount of a compound, material, or composition comprising a peptide or peptidomimetic of the present invention which is effective for producing some desired therapeutic effect by inhibiting an intracellular signalling pathway in at least a sub-population of cells in an animal and thereby blocking the biological consequences of that pathway in the treated cells, at a reasonable benefit/risk ratio applicable to any medical treatment.
  • phrases "pharmaceutically acceptable” is employed herein to refer to those compounds, materials, compositions, and/or dosage forms which are, within the scope of sound medical judgment, suitable for use in contact with the tissues of human beings and animals without excessive toxicity, irritation, allergic response, or other problem or complication, commensurate with a reasonable benefit/risk ratio.
  • pharmaceutically-acceptable carrier means a pharmaceutically-acceptable material, composition or vehicle, such as a liquid or solid filler, diluent, excipient, solvent or encapsulating material, involved in carrying or transporting the subject peptidomimetic agent from one organ, or portion of the body, to another organ, or portion of the body.
  • a pharmaceutically-acceptable material such as a liquid or solid filler, diluent, excipient, solvent or encapsulating material, involved in carrying or transporting the subject peptidomimetic agent from one organ, or portion of the body, to another organ, or portion of the body.
  • Each carrier must be “acceptable” in the sense of being compatible with the other ingredients of the formulation and not injurious to the patient.
  • materials which can serve as pharmaceutically-acceptable carriers include: (1) sugars, such as lactose, glucose and sucrose; (2) starches, such as corn starch and potato starch; (3) cellulose, and its derivatives, such as sodium carboxymethyl cellulose, ethyl cellulose and cellulose acetate; (4) powdered tragacanth; (5) malt; (6) gelatin; (7) talc; (8) excipients, such as cocoa butter and suppository waxes; (9) oils, such as peanut oil, cottonseed oil, safflower oil, sesame oil, olive oil, corn oil and soybean oil; (10) glycols, such as propylene glycol; (11) polyols, such as glycerin, sorbitol, mannitol and polyethylene glycol; (12) esters, such as ethyl oleate and ethyl laurate; (13) agar; (14) buffering agents, such as magnesium hydroxide and aluminum hydrox
  • certain embodiments of the present SH2-inhibitors may contain a basic functional group, such as amino or alkylamino, and are, thus, capable of forming pharmaceutically-acceptable salts with pharmaceutically-acceptable acids.
  • pharmaceutically-acceptable salts refers to the relatively non-toxic, inorganic and organic acid addition salts of peptides or peptidomimetics of the present invention. These salts can be prepared in situ during the final isolation and purification of the peptidomimetics of the invention, or by separately reacting a purified peptidomimetic of the invention in its free base form with a suitable organic or inorganic acid, and isolating the salt thus formed.
  • Representative salts include the hydrobromide, hydrochloride, sulfate, bisulfate, phosphate, nitrate, acetate, valerate, oleate, palmitate, stearate, laurate, benzoate, lactate, phosphate, tosylate, citrate, maleate, fumarate, succinate, tartrate, napthylate, mesylate, glucoheptonate, lactobionate, and laurylsulphonate salts and the like.
  • lactate lactate
  • phosphate tosylate
  • citrate maleate
  • fumarate succinate
  • tartrate napthylate
  • mesylate mesylate
  • glucoheptonate lactobionate
  • laurylsulphonate salts and the like See, for example, Berge et al. (1977) "Pharmaceutical Salts", J. Pharm. Sci. 66:1-19)
  • the compounds of the present invention may contain one or more acidic functional groups and, thus, are capable of forming pharmaceutically-acceptable salts with pharmaceutically-acceptable bases.
  • pharmaceutically-acceptable salts in these instances refers to the relatively non-toxic, inorganic and organic base addition salts of peptides and peptidomimetics of the present invention.
  • salts can likewise be prepared in situ during the final isolation and purification of the peptides or peptidomimetics, or by separately reacting the purified compound in its free acid form with a suitable base, such as the hydroxide, carbonate or bicarbonate of a pharmaceutically-acceptable metal cation, with ammonia, or with a pharmaceutically-acceptable organic primary, secondary or tertiary amine.
  • a suitable base such as the hydroxide, carbonate or bicarbonate of a pharmaceutically-acceptable metal cation, with ammonia, or with a pharmaceutically-acceptable organic primary, secondary or tertiary amine.
  • Representative alkali or alkaline earth salts include the lithium, sodium, potassium, calcium, magnesium, and aluminum salts and the like.
  • Representative organic amines useful for the formation of base addition salts include ethylamine, diethylamine, ethylenediamine, ethanolamine, diethanolamine, piperazine and the like. (See, for example, Berge
  • wetting agents such as sodium lauryl sulfate and magnesium stearate, as well as coloring agents, release agents, coating agents, sweetening, flavoring and perfuming agents, preservatives and antioxidants can also be present in the compositions.
  • antioxidants examples include: (1) water soluble antioxidants, such as ascorbic acid, cysteine hydrochloride, sodium bisulfate, sodium metabisulfite, sodium sulfite and the like; (2) oil-soluble antioxidants, such as ascorbyl palmitate, butylated hydroxyanisole (BHA), butylated hydroxytoluene (BHT), lecithin, propyl gallate, alpha-tocopherol, and the like; and (3) metal chelating agents, such as citric acid, ethylenediamine tetraacetic acid (EDTA), sorbitol, tartaric acid, phosphoric acid, and the like.
  • water soluble antioxidants such as ascorbic acid, cysteine hydrochloride, sodium bisulfate, sodium metabisulfite, sodium sulfite and the like
  • oil-soluble antioxidants such as ascorbyl palmitate, butylated hydroxyanisole (BHA), butylated hydroxytoluene (BHT), le
  • Formulations of the present invention include those suitable for oral, nasal, topical (including buccal and sublingual), rectal, vaginal and/or parenteral administration.
  • the formulations may conveniently be presented in unit dosage form and may be prepared by any methods well known in the art of pharmacy.
  • the amount of active ingredient which can be combined with a carrier material to produce a single dosage form will vary depending upon the host being treated, the particular mode of administration.
  • the amount of active ingredient which can be combined with a carrier material to produce a single dosage form will generally be that amount of the peptide or peptidomimetic which produces a therapeutic effect. Generally, out of one hundred per cent, this amount will range from about 1 per cent to about ninety-nine percent of active ingredient, preferably from about 5 per cent to about 70 per cent, most preferably from about 10 per cent to about 30 per cent.
  • Methods of preparing these formulations or compositions include the step of bringing into association a compound of the present invention with the carrier and, optionally, one or more accessory ingredients.
  • the formulations are prepared by uniformly and intimately bringing into association a peptide or peptidomimetic of the present invention with liquid carriers, or finely divided solid carriers, or both, and then, if necessary, shaping the product.
  • Formulations of the invention suitable for oral administration may be in the form of capsules, cachets, pills, tablets, lozenges (using a flavored basis, usually sucrose and acacia or tragacanth), powders, granules, or as a solution or a suspension in an aqueous or non-aqueous liquid, or as an oil-in-water or water-in-oil liquid emulsion, or as an elixir or syrup, or as pastilles (using an inert base, such as gelatin and glycerin, or sucrose and acacia) and/or as mouth washes and the like, each containing a predetermined amount of a compound of the present invention as an active ingredient.
  • a peptide or peptidomimetic of the present invention may also be administered as a bolus, electuary or paste.
  • the active ingredient is mixed with one or more pharmaceutically-acceptable carriers, such as sodium citrate or dicalcium phosphate, and/or any of the following: (1) fillers or extenders, such as starches, lactose, sucrose, glucose, mannitol, and or silicic acid; (2) binders, such as, for example, carboxymethylcellulose, alginates, gelatin, polyvinyl pyrrolidone, sucrose and/or acacia; (3) humectants, such as glycerol; (4) disintegrating agents, such as agar-agar, calcium carbonate, potato or tapioca starch, alginic acid, certain silicates, and sodium carbonate; (5) solution retarding agents, such as paraffin; (6) absorption accelerators, such as quaternary ammonium compounds; (7) wetting agents, such as, for example, cetylene glycol, glycerol
  • compositions may also comprise buffering agents.
  • Solid compositions of a similar type may also be employed as fillers in soft and hard-filled gelatin capsules using such excipients as lactose or milk sugars, as well as high molecular weight polyethylene glycols and the like.
  • a tablet may be made by compression or molding, optionally with one or more accessory ingredients.
  • Compressed tablets may be prepared using binder (for example, gelatin or hydroxypropylmethyl cellulose), lubricant, inert diluent, preservative, disintegrant (for example, sodium starch glycolate or cross-linked sodium carboxymethyl cellulose), surface- active or dispersing agent.
  • Molded tablets may be made by molding in a suitable machine a mixture of the powdered peptide or peptidomimetic moistened with an inert liquid diluent.
  • the tablets, and other solid dosage forms of the pharmaceutical compositions of the present invention may optionally be scored or prepared with coatings and shells, such as enteric coatings and other coatings well known in the pharmaceutical-formulating art. They may also be formulated so as to provide slow or controlled release of the active ingredient therein using, for example, hydroxypropylmethyl cellulose in varying proportions to provide the desired release profile, other polymer matrices, liposomes and/or microspheres.
  • compositions may be sterilized by, for example, filtration through a bacteria-retaining filter, or by incorporating sterilizing agents in the form of sterile solid compositions which can be dissolved in sterile water, or some other sterile injectable medium immediately before use.
  • These compositions may also optionally contain opacifying agents and may be of a composition that they release the active ingredient(s) only, or preferentially, in a certain portion of the gastrointestinal tract, optionally, in a delayed manner.
  • embedding compositions which can be used include polymeric substances and waxes.
  • the active ingredient can also be in micro-encapsulated form, if appropriate, with one or more of the above-described excipients.
  • Liquid dosage forms for oral administration of the compounds of the invention include pharmaceutically acceptable emulsions, microemulsions, solutions, suspensions, syrups and elixirs.
  • the liquid dosage forms may contain inert diluents commonly used in the art, such as, for example, water or other solvents, solubilizing agents and emulsifiers, such as ethyl alcohol, isopropyl alcohol, ethyl carbonate, ethyl acetate, benzyl alcohol, benzyl benzoate, propylene glycol, 1,3-butylene glycol, oils (in particular, cottonseed, groundnut, corn, germ, olive, castor and sesame oils), glycerol, tetrahydrofuryl alcohol, polyethylene glycols and fatty acid esters of sorbitan, and mixtures thereof.
  • inert diluents commonly used in the art, such as, for example, water or other solvents, solubilizing agents and
  • the oral compositions can also include adjuvants such as wetting agents, emulsifying and suspending agents, sweetening, flavoring, coloring, perfuming and preservative agents.
  • adjuvants such as wetting agents, emulsifying and suspending agents, sweetening, flavoring, coloring, perfuming and preservative agents.
  • Suspensions in addition to the active peptides or peptidomimetics, may contain suspending agents as, for example, ethoxylated isostearyl alcohols, polyoxyethylene sorbitol and sorbitan esters, microcrystalline cellulose, aluminum metahydroxide, bentonite, agar-agar and tragacanth, and mixtures thereof.
  • suspending agents as, for example, ethoxylated isostearyl alcohols, polyoxyethylene sorbitol and sorbitan esters, microcrystalline cellulose, aluminum metahydroxide, bentonite, agar-agar and tragacanth, and mixtures thereof.
  • Formulations of the pharmaceutical compositions of the invention for rectal or vaginal administration may be presented as a suppository, which may be prepared by mixing one or more compounds of the invention with one or more suitable nonirritating excipients or carriers comprising, for example, cocoa butter, polyethylene glycol, a suppository wax or a salicylate, and which is solid at room temperature, but liquid at body temperature and, therefore, will melt in the rectum or vaginal cavity and release the active peptidomimetic.
  • suitable nonirritating excipients or carriers comprising, for example, cocoa butter, polyethylene glycol, a suppository wax or a salicylate, and which is solid at room temperature, but liquid at body temperature and, therefore, will melt in the rectum or vaginal cavity and release the active peptidomimetic.
  • Formulations of the present invention which are suitable for vaginal administration also include pessaries, tampons, creams, gels, pastes, foams or spray formulations containing such carriers as are known in the art to be appropriate.
  • Dosage forms for the topical or transdermal administration of a peptide or peptidomimetic of this invention include powders, sprays, ointments, pastes, creams, lotions, gels, solutions, patches and inhalants.
  • the active compound may be mixed under sterile conditions with a pharmaceutically-acceptable carrier, and with any preservatives, buffers, or propellants which may be required.
  • the ointments, pastes, creams and gels may contain, in addition to an active peptide or peptidomimetic of this invention, excipients, such as animal and vegetable fats, oils, waxes, paraffins, starch, tragacanth, cellulose derivatives, polyethylene glycols, silicones, bentonites, silicic acid, talc and zinc oxide, or mixtures thereof.
  • excipients such as animal and vegetable fats, oils, waxes, paraffins, starch, tragacanth, cellulose derivatives, polyethylene glycols, silicones, bentonites, silicic acid, talc and zinc oxide, or mixtures thereof.
  • Powders and sprays can contain, in addition to a compound of this invention, excipients such as lactose, talc, silicic acid, aluminum hydroxide, calcium silicates and polyamide powder, or mixtures of these substances.
  • Sprays can additionally contain customary propellants, such as chlorofluorohydrocarbons and volatile unsubstituted hydrocarbons, such as butane and propane.
  • Transdermal patches have the added advantage of providing controlled delivery of a compound of the present invention to the body.
  • dosage forms can be made by dissolving or dispersing the peptidomimetic in the proper medium.
  • Absorption enhancers can also be used to increase the flux of the peptidomimetic across the skin. The rate of such flux can be controlled by either providing a rate controlling membrane or dispersing the peptidomimetic in a polymer matrix or gel.
  • Opthalmic formulations are also contemplated as being within the scope of this invention.
  • compositions of this invention suitable for parenteral administration comprise one or more peptides or peptidomimetics of the invention in combination with one or more pharmaceutically-acceptable sterile isotonic aqueous or nonaqueous solutions, dispersions, suspensions or emulsions, or sterile powders which may be reconstituted into sterile injectable solutions or dispersions just prior to use, which may contain antioxidants, buffers, bacteriostats, solutes which render the formulation isotonic with the blood of the intended recipient or suspending or thickening agents.
  • aqueous and nonaqueous carriers examples include water, ethanol, polyols (such as glycerol, propylene glycol, polyethylene glycol, and the like), and suitable mixtures thereof, vegetable oils, such as olive oil, and injectable organic esters, such as ethyl oleate.
  • polyols such as glycerol, propylene glycol, polyethylene glycol, and the like
  • vegetable oils such as olive oil
  • injectable organic esters such as ethyl oleate.
  • Proper fluidity can be maintained, for example, by the use of coating materials, such as lecithin, by the maintenance of the required particle size in the case of dispersions, and by the use of surfactants.
  • compositions may also contain adjuvants such as preservatives, wetting agents, emulsifying agents and dispersing agents. Prevention of the action of microorganisms may be ensured by the inclusion of various antibacterial and antifungal agents, for example, paraben, chlorobutanol, phenol sorbic acid, and the like. It may also be desirable to include isotonic agents, such as sugars, sodium chloride, and the like into the compositions. In addition, prolonged absorption of the injectable pharmaceutical form may be brought about by the inclusion of agents which delay absorption such as aluminum monostearate and gelatin.
  • adjuvants such as preservatives, wetting agents, emulsifying agents and dispersing agents.
  • Prevention of the action of microorganisms may be ensured by the inclusion of various antibacterial and antifungal agents, for example, paraben, chlorobutanol, phenol sorbic acid, and the like. It may also be desirable to include isotonic agents, such as sugars, sodium chloride
  • the absorption of the drug in order to prolong the effect of a drug, it is desirable to slow the absorption of the drug from subcutaneous or intramuscular injection. This may be accomplished by the use of a liquid suspension of crystalline or amorphous material having poor water solubility. The rate of absorption of the drug then depends upon its rate of dissolution which, in turn, may depend upon crystal size and crystalline form. Alternatively, delayed absorption of a parenterally-administered drug form is accomplished by dissolving or suspending the drug in an oil vehicle.
  • Injectable depot forms are made by forming microencapsule matrices of the subject peptides or peptidomimetics in biodegradable polymers such as polylactide-polyglycolide. Depending on the ratio of drug to polymer, and the nature of the particular polymer employed, the rate of drug release can be controlled. Examples of other biodegradable polymers include poly(orthoesters) and poly(anhydrides). Depot injectable formulations are also prepared by entrapping the drug in liposomes or microemulsions which are compatible with body tissue.
  • the compounds of the present invention are administered as pharmaceuticals, to humans and animals, they can be given per se or as a pharmaceutical composition containing, for example, 0.1 to 99.5% (more preferably, 0.5 to 90%) of active ingredient in combination with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
  • the preparations of the present invention may be given orally, parenterally, topically, or rectally. They are of course given by forms suitable for each administration route. For example, they are administered in tablets or capsule form, by injection, inhalation, eye lotion, ointment, suppository, etc. administration by injection, infusion or inhilation; topical by lotion or ointment; and rectal by suppositories. Oral administration is preferred.
  • parenteral administration and “administered parenterally” as used herein means modes of administration other than enteral and topical administration, usually by injection, and includes, without limitation, intravenous, intramuscular, intraarterial, intrathecal, intracapsular, intraorbital, intracardiac, intradermal, intraperitoneal, transtracheal, subcutaneous, subcuticular, intraarticulare, subcapsular, subarachnoid, intraspinal and intrasternal injection and infusion.
  • systemic administration means the administration of a compound, drug or other material other than directly into the central nervous system, such that it enters the patient's system and, thus, is subject to metabolism and other like processes, for example, subcutaneous administration.
  • peptides and peptidomimetics may be administered to humans and other animals for therapy by any suitable route of administration, including orally, nasally, as by, for example, a spray, rectally, intravaginally, parenterally, intracisternally and topically, as by powders, ointments or drops, including buccally and sublingually.
  • the compounds of the present invention which may be used in a suitable hydrated form, and/or the pharmaceutical compositions of the present invention, are formulated into pharmaceutically-acceptable dosage forms by conventional methods known to those of skill in the art.
  • Actual dosage levels of the active ingredients in the pharmaceutical compositions of this invention may be varied so as to obtain an amount of the active ingredient which is effective to achieve the desired therapeutic response for a particular patient, composition, and mode of administration, without being toxic to the patient.
  • the selected dosage level will depend upon a variety of factors including the activity of the particular peptide or peptidomimetic of the present invention employed, or the ester, salt or amide thereof, the route of administration, the time of administration, the rate of excretion of the particular compound being employed, the duration of the treatment, other drugs, compounds and/or materials used in combination with the particular peptidomimetic employed, the age, sex, weight, condition, general health and prior medical history of the patient being treated, and like factors well known in the medical arts.
  • a physician or veterinarian having ordinary skill in the art can readily determine and prescribe the effective amount of the pharmaceutical composition required.
  • the physician or veterinarian could start doses of the compounds of the invention employed in the pharmaceutical composition at levels lower than that required in order to achieve the desired therapeutic effect and gradually increase the dosage until the desired effect is achieved.
  • a suitable daily dose of a peptide or peptidomimetic of the invention will be that amount of the compound which is the lowest dose effective to produce a therapeutic effect. Such an effective dose will generally depend upon the factors described above. Generally, intravenous, intracerebroventricular and subcutaneous doses of the compounds of this invention for a patient, when used for the indicated analgesic effects, will range from about 0.0001 to about 100 mg per kilogram of body weight per day.
  • the effective daily dose of the active peptide or peptidomimetic may be administered as two, three, four, five, six or more sub-doses administered separately at appropriate intervals throughout the day, optionally, in unit dosage forms.
  • composition While it is possible for a compound of the present invention to be administered alone, it is preferable to administer the peptidomimetic as a pharmaceutical formulation (composition).
  • the subject compounds can be contacted with a cell, either in vivo (e.g. adminstered to a patient or animal) or in vitro (e.g.
  • a cell culture employed in cell culture), to affect the responsiveness of a cell to a growth factor, cytokine or other receptor ligand; as an immunosuppressant; to prevent osteoclastic resorption of bone during osteoporosis; influence differentiation of cells; to modulate cellular response to interactions with the extracellular matrix, as well as affect the production and secretion of extracellular matrix components; prevent viral infection and/or viral-mediated transformation of cells; and to inhibit the proliferation of transformed cells or to render transformed cells more sensitive to cytostatic or cytotoxic agents.
  • the SH2 target of the subject inhibitors can range from the interaction between, for example, an activated receptor complex and the initial cytoplasmic proteins involved in triggering a particular set of intracellular signaling pathways, to the last SH2-mediated interaction in a specific pathway, such as the formation of a transcription factor complex or allosteric regulation of an enzymatic activity.
  • the inhibitors of the present invention can be used to prevent the interaction between a phosphotyrosine residue and such SH2-containing signal transduction proteins as, for example, Src, Lck, Fps, phosphatidylinositol-3-kinases, ras GTPase- activating protein, Fyn, Lyk, Fgr, Fes, ZAP-70, Abl, Crk, Nek, Sem-5, p85, phospholipase C, SHPTP1, SHPTP2, corkscrew, Syk, Lyn, Yes, Hck, Dsrc, Tec, Atk/Bpk, Itk/Tsk, Arg, Csk, tensin, Vav, She, Emt, Grb2, Syp, Blk, Bpk 113TF, 91TF, and Janus kinases including Tyk2, JAK1 and JAK2.
  • SH2-containing signal transduction proteins as, for example, Src, Lck, Fps
  • signal transduction pathways which activate protein tyrosine kinases and result in modulation of gene expression and cell morphology.
  • a number of mechanistically distinct signal pathways, mediated by tyrosine phosphorylation states and linking cell surface receptors to transcriptional factors and other enzymes are understood to exist.
  • the subject compound inhibits the signal transducing ability of an SH2 protein having an enzymatic activity.
  • exemplary enzymes include cytoplasmic tyrosine kinases (eg. src, abl, lck, nek), phosphotyrosine phosphatases, phospholipase C ⁇ (PLC ⁇ ), ras GTPase activating proteins (r ⁇ sGAPs), and nucleotide echange factors (Koch et al. (1991) Science 252:668-674).
  • preventing SH2-mediated interactions with the compounds of the present invention can inhibit the compartilization or localization of an SH2-containing enzyme by disrupting a phosphotyrosine-SH2 mediated interaction which would otherwise act to sequester the enzyme at a particular cellular location, such as at the cytoplasmic face of the cell membrane.
  • the subjet inhibitors can be used to modulate the regulation of SH2-containing enzymes by inhibiting the formation of specific multi-protein complexes, or other forms of allosteric control.
  • Illustrative of therapeutic targets of this class of SH2 protein include a number of inducers of signal transduction pathways, such as growth factors like EGF, PDGF, nerve growth factor (NGF) or insulin, are generally understood to activate one or more tyrosine kinase cascades, which include members of the src-family of protein tyrosine kinases, that eventually lead to activation of transcriptional factors localized in the nucleus.
  • tyrosine kinases of the src-family are coupled to cell surface receptors in lymphocytes and function as signal transducers after specific ligand binding. Examples are the associations of CD4 and CD8 with lck (Veillette et al.
  • src-related kinases in the regulation of a variety of intracellular events, from lymphokine production and cytotoxicity, to the expression of specific nuclear binding proteins.
  • receptor-src interactions represent a first step in a cascade of intracellular events.
  • a proximal and critical biochemical event upon T cell antigen receptor (TCR) stimulation is the activation of a protein tyrosine kinase pathway.
  • ZAP-70 a PTK of the p72syk family, associates with phosphorylated TCR subunits through its SH2 domains, and has a remarkably restricted repertoire of protein binding (Wange et al. (1993) J Biol Chem 268:19797-19801).
  • cytoplasmic tyrosine kinases may serve essential regulatory functions.
  • csk is beleived to modify the activity of other tyrosine kinases (i.e. src subfamily) and down regulate the signal transduction pathways in which they participate (Nada et al. (1991) Nature 351 :69-72; Okada et al. (1991) J Biol Chem 266:24249-24252).
  • MHC peptide-major histocompatibility complex
  • TCRs antigen-specific T cell receptors
  • contacting a T-cell with one of the subject peptides or peptidomimetics result in inhibition of T-cell activation and may used to induce immunosuppression by clonal anergy.
  • contacting the cells simultaneously, or in close temporal proximity, with antigen and a compound of the present invention may result in immunosuppresion due to clonal deletion.
  • the subject compounds can be employed in the treatment of, for example, autoimmune disorders, to prevent graft rejection, and in the production of anergic preparations for treating allergies, e.g. for delivery with danders, pollens, etc.
  • interleukin-3 erythropoietin
  • steel factor all induce the tyrosine phosphorylation of the SH2-containing protein, p52shc.
  • the formation of a complex between p52shc and the adaptor protein, Grb2 is an apparent direct link of tyrosine phoshphorylayion events to the activation of ras in hemopoietic progenitors and believed to be a critical step in stimulating these cells to transit through Gl to S phase and enter into mitosis (Cutler et al. (1993) J. Biol Chem 268:21463-21465).
  • transcriptional factors with SH2 domains bind directly to ligand-activated, receptor-associated tyrosine kinase(s). This association of the kinase and transcriptional factors in turn results in tyrosine phosphorylation and activation of the transcriptional factor, triggering its localization to the nucleus and mediating formation of an active transcriptional complex with other nuclear DNA-binding proteins.
  • subunits of the interferon- ⁇ induced transcription factor complex ISGF3 (namely, the transcriptional factor subunits 113TF, 91TF, and 84TF) contain SH2 domains and are directly activated by tyrosine phosphorylation in the cytoplasm. These activated subunits translocate to the nucleus to form an active transcriptional complex with p48.
  • a variety of other growth factors and cytokines including interferon- ⁇ , EGF, PDGF, CSF-1, IL-3, IL-5, IL-10, CNTF, LIF and GM-CSF, employ a pathway similar to that of interferon- ⁇ , in that are capalble of activating transcriptional factors having SH2 domains (Fu et al. (1992) Cell 70:323; Montminey (1993) Science 261 :1694; Larnet et al. (1993) Science 261 :1730; Ruff- Jamison et al. (1993) Science 261:1733; Silvennoinen et al. (1993) Science 261:1736; Sadowski et al.
  • Disruption of transcriptional regulation mediated by such factors can be accomplished with the subject peptides or peptidomimetics by inhibiting the interaction of the transcription factor with an upstream activating kinase, or by inhibiting the interaction of the phosphorylated transcription factor with other SH2- containing transcription factors to form active complexes.
  • each of these signal transduction pathways proteins that contain one or more SH2 domains.
  • interactions between phosphotyrosine residues on autophosphorylated receptors and SH2 domains of signal-transducing proteins are critical for the formation of signal transduction complexes, and represent the initial transduction signals which stimulate a cascade of additional molecular interactions involved in disseminating the signal throughout the cell by complex, branching pathways that coordinate multifunctional cellular programs and control cell behavior.
  • Each of the receptor binding proteins control at least one cellular pathway involved in the biological response to the growth factor.
  • selective intracellular signaling pathway targets can be inhibited so as to grossly alter the cell's response parameters to the external stimulus at one extreme, or, at the other, to result only in modification of particular portion(s) of the cell's physiological response to the stimulus.
  • the subject compounds are utilized to modulate the response of a cell to a growth factor or cytokine.
  • a growth factor or cytokine a growth factor or cytokine.
  • the binding of growth factors to their membrane receptors activates a cascade of intracellular signaling pathways that regulate phospholipid metabolism, arachidonate metabolism, protein phosphorylation, calcium mobilization and transport, and transcriptional regulation.
  • These signaling events can result in a diversity of changes in transport properties, acute metabolic activities, membrane trafficking, cytoskeletal interactions, and the programming of gene induction governing cell growth, differentiation, and migration.
  • Abberations in these growth factor-induced events are, for example, associated with a variety of hyperproliferative disorders such as leukemia, cancer, psoriasis, atherosclerosis, and restinosis.
  • polypeptide growth factor receptors have been characterized, some which possess intrinsic protein tyrosine kinase activity such as the receptors for epidermal growth factor (EGF), platelet-derived growth factor (PDGF), insulin, and certain protooncogene products including c-kit (the stem cell factor receptor) and c-fms (the macrophage colony- stimulating factor receptor); others of which have no intrinsic kinase acitivity but which sequester tyrosine kinases from the cytosol upon ligand binding, such as the receptors for interl ⁇ ukin-6, ciliary neurotrophic factor (CNTF), and Oncostatin-M.
  • EGF epidermal growth factor
  • PDGF platelet-derived growth factor
  • insulin insulin
  • protooncogene products including c-kit (the stem cell factor receptor) and c-fms (the macrophage colony- stimulating factor receptor); others of which have no intrinsic kinase acitivity but which sequester tyrosine
  • the subject compounds can be used to inhibit proliferation of transformed cells that are stimulated by autocrine feedback loops.
  • autocrine feedback loops For example, a variety of human tumors frequently express high levels of both EGF receptors and one of its ligands, transforming growth factor alpha (TGF ⁇ ). The synthesis and release of TGF ⁇ by a cell also able to be stimulated by this ligand is widely believed to create stimulatory autocrine loops (Baselga et al. (1993) J Natl Cancer Inst 85:1327-1333; and Fan et al. (1993) Cancer Res 53:4322-4328).
  • TGF ⁇ transforming growth factor alpha
  • 20 to 30 percent of cancer disease is characterized by transformed cells expressing oncogenic products which are growth factor receptors or their mutated homologs, and which exhibit protein tyrosine kinase activity. That is, they are capable of constitutive activation of signal transduction processes which drive the cell's proliferation. Inhibition of one or more intracellular signaling pathways by the present compounds can inhibit proliferation of tumor cells, and may be used alone or for potentiating the efficacy of other chemotherapeutic agents.
  • the cell can be contacted with one or more compounds of the present invention suitable for inhibiting the interaction of the activated EGF receptor with such SH2- containing proteins as phospholipase C- ⁇ , Grb2, syp, the p85 subunit of phosphotidylinositol- 3 -kinase, abl, nek, the transcription factor p91, or a combination thereof, so as to prevent signal transduction events which are involved in mitogenesis and cell proliferation.
  • the subject compounds can be utilized to inhibit SH2 -mediated interactions oth the chimeric oncoprotein BCR-ABL (with, for example, grb2), which has been implicated in the pathogenesis of Philadelphia chromosome-positive human leukemias.
  • the subject peptides and peptidomimetics can also be used to modify only a portion of the bioliogical response of a cell to a particular growth factor. For instance, sensitivity of a particular cell to a growth factor, or other mitogenic stimulus, which utilizes a ras signalling pathway can be either up-regulated or down-regulated by disruption of the SH2-mediated interactions of the ras protein and effector proteins which allosterically control the GTPase activity. As noted above, many tyrosine kinases, including the receptors for hormones, such as EGF, NGF and insulin, transmit intracellular signals through Ras proteins.
  • hormones such as EGF, NGF and insulin
  • rasGEFs guaninine-nucleotide exchange factors
  • Grb2 which binds the autophosphorylated EGF receptor through its SH2 domain, links the EGF receptor to a ra-sGEF.
  • rasGAP GTPase-activating protein
  • rasGAP GTPase-activating protein
  • the present peptide analogs can be used to exploit the often antagositic relationships between a kinase and a phosphatase in signal transduction, by regulating the activity and/or localization of one of two.
  • the subject inhibitors can be used to increase the sensitivity of a cell to a cytokine or growth factor which is pyrogenic in an animal (e.g. CNTF, IL-6 or LIF).
  • CNTF cytokine
  • IL-6 cytokine growth factor
  • the subject peptides and peptidomimetics can be used to modulate an immune response, such as to cause general or specific immunosuppression.
  • the compounds of the present invention can be used to prevent antigen-specific or mitogen-induced differentiation and prolieration of B lymphocytes.
  • engagement of the B-cell antigen receptor complex induces immediate activation of receptor- associated Src family tyrosine kinases including p55blk, p59fyn, p53/561yn, and perhaps p561ck.
  • kinases act directly or indirectly to phosphorylate and/or activate effector proteins including the microtubule-associated protein kinase (MAPK), phospholipase C- ⁇ l (PLC- ⁇ l) and C- ⁇ 2 (PLC- ⁇ 2), ⁇ hosphatidylinositol-3-kinase (PI-3-K), and p21ras-GTPase- activating protein (GAP).
  • MAPK microtubule-associated protein kinase
  • PLC- ⁇ l phospholipase C- ⁇ l
  • PLC- ⁇ 2 C- ⁇ 2
  • PI-3-K ⁇ hosphatidylinositol-3-kinase
  • GAP p21ras-GTPase- activating protein
  • another aspect of the present invention comprises the inhibition of T cell activation.
  • Signal transduction through the T-cell receptor and cytokine receptors on the surface of T lymphocytes occurs largely via tyrosine phosphorylation of intracellular substrates.
  • tyrosine phosphorylation of intracellular substrates Several members of the src and syk families of tyrosine kinases have been implicated in signal transduction in lymphocytes, as well as other unique tyrosine kinases, such as emt, that are expressed mainly in T lymphocyte. Inhibition of certain signal pathways mediated by SH2 proteins can therefore be used to suppress activation of T cells.
  • emt appears related to the B-cell progenitor kinase (bpk), which has been implicated in X-linked hypogammaglobulinemia, to the tecl mammalian kinase, which has been implicated in liver neoplasia, and to the more widely expressed tecll mammalian kinase (Gibson et al. (1993) Blood 82:1561-1572), each of which represent potential therapeutic targets for compounds of the present invention.
  • bpk B-cell progenitor kinase
  • IL-2R IL-2 receptors
  • the receptor for IL-2 consists of at least three distinct subunits, the beta chain of which is understood to be critical for receptor-mediated signalling through physical association with, and activation of, a src- family protein kinase (p561ck).
  • IL-2R beta is linked to at least two intracellular signalling pathways that mediate nuclear proto-oncogene induction.
  • One pathway is linked to the induction of the c-fos, c-jun, and other genes of this family.
  • Another pathway leads to c-myc gene induction.
  • Such protocols can be used, for example, in conjunction with organ and tissue transplantation, to prevent, for example, rejection of the graft by the host, or graft-versus-host disease mediated by T lymphocytes of the graft.
  • the same strategy can also be carried out to induce clonal deletion of B-lymphocytes.
  • the present compounds may also be used to modulate expression of the early-intermediate genes (cIE), such as fos, jun, and myc, in other tissue in order to prevent apoptosis.
  • cIE early-intermediate genes
  • the compounds of the present invention can be used to prevent apoptotic events in neurodegenerative disorders associated with activation of cIE genes by, for example, calcium-induced intracellular signalling or excititory amino acids.
  • the subject compounds can be used to inhibit certain bioligical actions of such mitogens as vascular endothelial growth factor (VEGF).
  • VEGF vascular endothelial growth factor
  • the subject peptides and peptidomimetics can be employed to inhibit the abnormal proliferation of smooth muscle which takes place in atherosclerosis and which is induced by VEGF.
  • another aspect of the present invention comprises inhibiting the angiogenic acitivity of VEGF in order to prevent vascularization of hyperproliferative tissue, particularly in th treatment of endometriosis.
  • the subject inhibitors can be used to affect the differentiation of a cell or tissue.
  • EGF plays an important physiological role in the control of adipocyte differentiation, as a potent inhibitor of adipose differetiation and inhibitor of adipose tissue development.
  • SH2 inhibitor the present compounds can be used in livestock to repartition nutrients between subcutaneous fat and other carcass components, including muscle, skin, bone and certain organs.
  • the subject compounds can be used to control the response of cells to extracellular matric interactions.
  • the present compounds can be employed to modulate the biological consequence of integrin- mediated cell adhesion to extracellular matrix components. It is generally understood that occupation of integrins can result in the transduction of intracellular signals, leading to cytoskeletal reorganization and induction of gene expression. Such physiological events are believed to mediated, at least in part, by potential targets for the subject compounds, such as the observed accumulation of p21ra-s in the active GTP bound state (Kepron et al. (1993) J Biol Chem 268:20701-20704) or phosphotyrosine accumulation.
  • the subject inhibitors are useful for disrupting the signal transduction pathway(s) originating from the leukocyte response intregrin (LRI), which mediate adhesion, chemotaxis, and activation of increased phagocytic potential by neutrophils (PMN) and monocytes (Carreno et al. (1993) Clin Immunol Immunopathol 69:43-51).
  • LRI leukocyte response intregrin
  • PMN neutrophils
  • monocytes monocytes
  • Another aspect of the present invention comprises inducing chondrogenesis by affecting the integrin-mediated differentiation of chondrocytes which ordinarily inhibits cartilage synthesis.
  • the modulation of the chondrocyte phenotype, between mature fibro- chonrocytes and cartilage-producing chondroblasts, is related to integrin-mediated intracellular signalling (Loeser et al. (1993) Arthritis Rheum 36:1103-1110).
  • the present invention contemplates the use of the subject compounds in the field of cartilage transplantation and prosthetic device therapies. To date, the growth of new cartilage from either transplantation of autologous or allogenic cartilage has been largely unsuccessful.
  • cartilage and fibrocartilage varies between different tissue: such as between articular, meniscal cartilage, ligaments, and tendons, between the two ends of the same ligament or tendon, and between the superficial and deep parts of the tissue.
  • the zonal arrangement of these tissues may reflect a gradual change in mechanical properties, and failure occurs when implanted tissue, which has not differentiated under those conditions, lacks the ability to appropriately respond. For instance, when meniscal cartilage is used to repair anterior cruciate ligaments, the tissue undergoes a metaplasia to pure fibrous tissue.
  • the subject compounds can be used to particularly addresses this problem, by causing the implanted cells to become more adaptive to the new environment and effectively resemble hypertrophic chondrocytes of an earlier developmental stage of the tissue.
  • the action of chondrogensis in the implanted tissue, as provided by the subject compounds, and the mechanical forces on the actively remodeling tissue can synergize to produce an improved implant more suitable for the new function to which it is to be put.
  • the subject method can be applied to enhancing both the generation of prosthetic cartilage devices and to their implantation.
  • the need for improved treatment has motivated research aimed at creating new cartilage that is based on collagen- glycosaminoglycan templates (Stone et al. (1990) Clin Orthop Relat Red 252:129), isolated chondrocytes (Grande et al. (1989) J Orthop Res 7:208; and Takigawa et al. (1987) Bone Miner 2:449), and chondrocytes attached to natural or synthetic polymers (Walitani et al. (1989) J Bone Jt Surg 71B:74; Vacanti et al.
  • chondrocytes can be grown in culture on biodegradable, biocompatible highly porous scaffolds formed from polymers such as polyglycolic acid, polylactic acid, agarose gel, or other polymers which degrade over time as function of hydrolysis of the polymer backbone into innocuous monomers.
  • the matrices are designed to allow adequate nutrient and gas exchange to the cells until engraftment occurs.
  • the cells can be cultured in vitro until adequate cell volume and density has developed for the cells to be implanted.
  • One advantage of the matrices is that they can be cast or molded into a desired shape on an individual basis, so that the final product closely resembles the patient's own ear or nose (by way of example), or flexible matrices can be used which allow for manipulation at the time of implantation, as in a joint.
  • the implants are contacted with a petidomimetic of the present invention during the culturing process in order to induce and/or maintain differentiated chondrocytes in the culture and to further stimulate cartilage matrix production within the implant.
  • the cultured cells can be caused to maintain a phenotype typical of a chondrogenic cell (i.e. hypertrophic), and hence continue the population of the matrix and production of cartilage tissue.
  • the subject compounds can be used to prevent osteoclastic bone resorption, such as which occurs during postmenopausal osteoporosis.
  • Such a therapy would be directed at the action of ⁇ p6 -src, or downstream transduction proteins, which has been shown to be required and essential for osteoclastic bone resorption (Yoneda et al. (1993) J Clin Invest 91 :2791-2795; and Tanaka et al. (1993) FEBS Lett 313:85-89).
  • the therapeutic preparation contains a peptide or peptidomimetic which inhibits osteoclastic bone resorption, and a second agent which stimulates new bone formation.
  • integrins may mediate the differentiation of osteoblasts, analagous to the stimulation of chondroblasts, suggesting that the subject compounds can be used to induce bone formation.
  • the subject compounds also have utility in production of transgenic animals.
  • the compounds of the present invention can be use to offset detrimental side effects associated with overexpression of a recombinant protein in the tissue or bodily fluid of a transgenic animal.
  • the present inhibitors can be used to prevent detrimental consequences associated with overexpression of a growth factor, or to prevent hyperinsulinema in transgenic animals producing recombinant insulin. Use of the present inhibitors to this end can facilitate tolerance to increased levels of recombinant protein production, and thereby increase the yield per animal.
  • the subject compounds can also be used as speciality chemicals, such as to facilitate the dissection of intracellular signalling pathways. For example, since the discovery of insulin and its receptor, the downstream elements responsible for the pleiotropic insulin signal have been difficult to define. Utilizing the present compounds, particular pathways originating from the insulin receptor can be inhibited in order to ascertain the role of each signal pathway in the biological repsonse of the cell to insulin.
  • the subject compounds can be utilized in an insecticide formulation, such as to destroy fruit flies.
  • an insecticide formulation such as to destroy fruit flies.
  • inhibitors of the SH2-containing proteins corkscrew or Dsrc can be used to kill Drosphilia.
  • the substituents on the azepine core can be chosen so as to maximize absorption by mature flies or by larva.
  • Example 1 ⁇ -Hydroxy-N-benzyloxycarbonylglycine (22 A) Benzyl carbamate (63g, .05mol) was stirred with glyoxylic acid monohydrate (5.09g, .055mol) in dry ether (50mL). The crystalline product 22A (7.8 lg, 73%) formed was filtered and washed with ether.
  • Example 2 ⁇ -(Isopropylthio)-N-(benzyloxycarbonyl) glycine (22B) ⁇ -hydroxy-N-benzyloxycarbonylglycine 22A (5.57g, .027mol) of Example 1 was stirred with isopropylmercaptan (8.29g, .l lmol) in glacial acetic acid (26.5mL) at 0°C. Cone H 2 SO 4 (.27mL) was added and the mixture stirred for 2 days at room temperature. The mixture was then poured into ice and the organic layer extracted with ethyl acetate. The ethyl acetate solution was washed with water, 5% NaHCO3, dried over MgSO4, solvent removed to give 22B in 94% yield. This was used without further purification.
  • Example 3 2-[N-( -(Isopropylthio)-N-(benzyloxycarbonyl)-glycinyl)aminoJbenzophenone (24) ⁇ -(isopropylthio)-N-(benyloxycarbonyl)glycine 22B was dissolved in methylene chloride (200mL) under nitrogen atmosphere at 0°C in a three necked flask carrying an additional funnel. To the stirred solution was added N-methylmo ⁇ holine (2.1 lmL, 19.3mmol) followed by isobutylchloroformate (2.48mL, 19.2mmol). This was stirred for 15 minutes at 0 °C and then heated to reflux.
  • N-methylmo ⁇ holine 2.1 lmL, 19.3mmol
  • isobutylchloroformate 2.48mL, 19.2mmol
  • Example 4 2-f-(a-Amino-N -(benzylcarbonyl)glycinyl)aminoJ-benzophenone (25).
  • the crude product 2 ⁇ (9.3g, 20:17mmol) was dissolved in 133mL of dry tetrahydrafuran. This solution was saturated with ammonia at 0°C for 30 minutes and then mercuric chloride (6g, 22.09mmol) was added in one portion to the stirred solution while ammonia gas was bubbled through the solution. After bubbling ammonia gas for 2 hours at 0°C it was bubbled for an additional hour at room temperature. The suspended solids were filtered and the solvent evaporated to yield 25 (9.7g) which was used without further purification.
  • Example 5 1 ,3-Dihydro-5-phenyl-3(R,S)-[ (benzyloxycarbonyl) -amino]- 2H-l,4-benzodiazepin-2-one (26).
  • Crude ⁇ -amino-glycinamide 25 (9.7g, 24.04mmol) was dissolved in 182mL of glacial acetic acid, and ammonium acetate (8.73g, 113.37mmol) was added to this solution under nitrogen atmosphere, with the resulting reaction mixture stirred overnight under dry conditions. This mixture was concentrated under reduced pressure and stirred with 105mL ethyl acetate and 25mL IN sodium hydroxide solution for 30 minutes.
  • Example 6 l,3Dihydro-5-phenyl-l-(ethoxy carbonyl methyl)-(R,S)-[(benzyloxycarbonyl)-amino] 2H-1,4- benzodiazepin-2-one (27).
  • Sodium hydride (60% suspension in mineral oil) (.53g, 13.5mmol) was stirred with dry dimethyl formamide (3mL) under argon atmosphere in an ice bath.
  • Example 7 (Carboxymethyl)-l ,3-Dihydro-5-phenyl-3(R,S)-[(benzyloxycarbonyl)-amino] 2H-1 ,4- benzodiazepin-2-one (29)
  • Crude product 22 of Example 6 (6g, 12.73mmol) was dissolved in dioxane (15mL) and water (15mL) and cooled in an ice bath. 2N sodium hydroxide was added to this solution till pH of the solution reached 10. The heterogenous mixture was stirred at room temperature until it became homogenous. The homogenous layer was extracted with ether, and the aqueous layer acidified to pH 2 using 4N HC1. This was extracted with dichloromethane (150x3 mL), and dried over magnesium sulphate to give 5.52g of 29 (95% yield from compound 26) as a pure white solid.
  • Tetrahydrafuran was removed in vacuum and the resulting solid was dissolved in ethylacetate, and the salts filtered off.
  • the ethyl acetate extract was washed with 5% citric acid, 5% sodium bicarbonate solution, water, brine and dried over MgSO 4 - Solvent evaporated to give 0.70g of the crude 2-isoleucyl diazepine 10. This was chromatographed on silica gel column using 40% ethyl acetate/60% hexane to give 0.59g of pure 10 (92% yield).
  • Example 9 3(R,S)-Amino-l, 3-dihydro-l-[(methoxy isoleucyl) carboxymethyl]-5-phenyl-2H-l , 4- benzodiazepin-2-one (31)
  • Compound 3O (0.59g, 1.02mmol) was dissolved in 15mL of methanol under argon atmosphere.
  • 10%Pd/C (0.05g) was added and then the system was evacuated, and twice flushed with argon and twice with hydrogen before hydrogenation was started. The mixture was allowed to stir overnight with hydrogen from a balloon. It was then cautiously filtered using a sintered glass funnel carrying filter agent. The residue was washed with warm methanol twice and the filtrate was evaporated in vacuum to give the deprotected compound H (0.41g, 91% yield).
  • Example 10 1 ,3-Dihydro-l -[(methoxy isoleucyl)carbonylmethyl]-5-phenyl-3 (R,S)- ⁇ [(N-fluorenylmethoxy carbonyl) -phosphonotyrosyl] dimethyl ester-amino ⁇ -2H-l,4-benzodiazepin-2-one (32).
  • N-Fmoc phosphotyrosine dimethyl ester (.14g, 0.28mmol) was stirred with THF under argon at -20°C. To this was added NMM (0.03mL,0.28mmol) and isobutylchloroformate (0.04mL, 0.28mmol) and stirred for 5 minutes.
  • Example 13 l,3-Dihydro-l-[(methoxy-L-isoleucyl)carbonylmethyl)-5-phenyl-3(R,S)- ⁇ [(N-acetyl)- phosphono—tyrosyl) dimethyl ester amino]-2H-l,4-benzodiazepin-2-one (35)
  • NMM O.Ol ⁇ mL, 0.14mmol
  • acetyl chloride 0.01 lmL, 0.14mmol
  • Example 14 l,3Dihydro-l-[(methoxy-L-isoleucyl)-carbonylmethyl)-5-phenyl-3(R,S)- ⁇ [(N-acetyl)- phosphono-L-tyrosyl]amino ⁇ -2H-l,4 -benzodiazepin-2-one (36)
  • TMSB bromotrimethyl silane
  • Example 15 Demonstration of the effect of (36) on Middle T/fyn interaction Approximately lO ⁇ g of a GST-Fyn fusion protein bound to lO ⁇ l of glutathione- Sepharose beads were incubated with 90 ⁇ l of buffer (TEB, pH 9.0) and lO ⁇ l of DMSO or DMSO containing an isomer (#1 or #2) of compound 16 (lanes 2 and 3 equal 3.95x10' ⁇ M; lane 4 equals 1.32X10 ⁇ 4M; lane 5 equals 3.95xl0" ⁇ M). Lane 1 contains no inhibitor.
  • the lanes labeled "MT 315" (lanes 6 and 7) are reaction mixutures as above, but having 20 ⁇ g of peptide (middle T residues EEYMPMED) instead of the benzodiazepine 16.
  • the label "pY” indicates the peptide was phosphorylated, while unphosphoryalated peptide is designated as "-”.
  • the reaction mixtures were incubated for 1 hour, then 100 ⁇ L 32p_ ⁇ aDe ⁇ e£ ⁇ Middle T (polyoma), prepared from baculovirus co-expression of middle T and src in Sf9 cells, were added to each reaction and incubated for 1 hour more at 4°C.
  • Example 16 Demonstration of the effect of (36) and (33) on SH2 interactions
  • the ability of the subject compounds to inhibit the interaction between a specific peptide and an SH2 domain was determined.
  • Various SH2 domains were subcloned in frame with the glutathione-S-transferase affinity tag of the pGEX vector system (Pharmacia catalog no. PGEX-4T-3).
  • the resulting pGEX-E2 construct encoded a glutathione-S-transferase (GST)/SH2 fusion protein (Smith et al. (1988) Gene 67:31-40).
  • the pGEX construct was introduced into E.coli by transfromation, and the transformants grown in liquid media (LB) in the presence of IPTG. Purification of GST/E2 fusion protein was by standard protocols ⁇ Current Protocols in Molecular Biology, eds. Ausubel et al. (NY: John Wiley & Sons, 1991); Pharmacia instruction booklet (for catalog no. 27-4570)) using a glutathione-sepharose column (Pharmacia catalog no. 27-4570).
  • the cells were pelleted and resuspended in buffer A (50mM TRIS (pH7.5), 2mM EDTA, 250mM NaCl, 5% glycerol (V/V), 1% Tween (V/V), 1% Triton X 100 (V/V)), to which 2mM PMSF and 15mM 2-mercaptoethanol were added.
  • buffer A 50mM TRIS (pH7.5), 2mM EDTA, 250mM NaCl, 5% glycerol (V/V), 1% Tween (V/V), 1% Triton X 100 (V/V)
  • buffer A 50mM TRIS (pH7.5), 2mM EDTA, 250mM NaCl, 5% glycerol (V/V), 1% Tween (V/V), 1% Triton X 100 (V/V)
  • the beads were washed 3 times in cold buffer A followed by 5 washes in 50mM Tris, pH 8.0
  • the peptide against which the subject compounds were tested was of the sequence EPQYEEIPIYL.
  • the protocol for the conjugation of proteins with amine reactive probes was followed. Briefly, lOmgs of FITC in lOO ⁇ L of DMSO was added dropwise to lOmgs of peptide. The material was incubated for lhr at room temperature with shaking.
  • the IDEXX lck-SH2 binding assay was carried out employing the GST-SH2 fusion protein, the FITC-labeled peptide, and a sample peptidomimetic of the present invention which was N-protected with either an FMOC moiety (H of Figure 2D) or acetyl moiety (36 of Figure 2D). Briefly, the SH2 -beads were wash 3 times with cold (4°C) Tris Buffered Saline (TBS), and centrifuged (5 min., 2000g, 4°C) between washes. The bead pellet was resuspended in TBS, diluting the beads 1/20 (v/v). The beads are subsequently kept cold before use.
  • TBS Tris Buffered Saline
  • the lyophilized FITC-peptide was resuspended in TBS into the volume before lyophilization (1 ml/tube), and then diluted 1/20 into TBS. The FITC-peptide was subsequently kept cold and protected from light.
  • the peptidomimetic was added in varying concentrations to yield the final concentrations as indicated in Figure 7.
  • the contents of each well were pipeted up and down with a multi-channel pipetter to mix, and then incubated 5-60 mins at room temperature and protected from the light.
  • the assay plates were then placed in the Idexx instrument and a vacuum at 25 inches Hg was applied until all of the liquid was removed from the wells. The vacuum was then shut-off and the plates washed with TBS. The vacuum was applied again to aspirate the TBS wash, and which was repeated once.
  • the plates were then analyzed for FITC-labeled peptide binding, and the percent inhibition determined by the ability of the subject peptidomimetic to inhibit binding of the FITC-labeled peptide.
  • the inhibition data was plotted, as shown in Figure 7. As indicated by Figure 7, the FMOC-derivative exhibited an IC50 in the present system of 48.2 ⁇ M, and the Ac-derivative had an IC 50 of 270.9 ⁇ M.
  • Example 17 p-Boronophenylalanine can be synthesized by the scheme illustrated in Figure 5D. Accordingly, from p-bromotoluene £ by Grignard reaction and treatment with triethylborate at -78 °C followed by hydrolysis gave p-boronotoluene £2- This on bromination and oxidation gave £4 according to Snyder et al. (1958) / Am Chem Soc 80:835-838.
  • Example 18 As shown in Figure 5E, p-bromobenzaldehyde 91 is converted to its acetyl 22. Further treatment with Mg converted 22 to its Grignard reagent, and reaction with triethyl borate and sulfuric acid yielded p-boronobenzaldehyde _____.. This reaction sequence is based on a similar reaction by Matteson et al. (1983) Organometallics 2:1529-35. The compound 24 can be further converted to p-boronophenylalanine as described in Example 17.
  • Example 19 Figure 5G illustrates another reaction scheme for synthesis of p-boronomethyl- phenylalanine and the like.
  • Iodomethananeboronate 101 can be prepared according to uts et al. (1982) / Organometallic Chem 234:137-141. This can be converted to the corresponding zinc halide, and then to the more reactive copper derivative by reaction with CuCN-2LiCl in by adaption of the procedure of Knochel, P (1990) J Am Chem Soc 112:7 '431-7 '433. This product, on reaction with p-bromobenzaldehyde will give the corresponding boronate 103 which can be further converted to p-boronomethyl- phenylalanine 104 or the like.
  • tyrosine benzyl ester 111 can be converted to N- acetyltyrosine benzyl ester (2) using acetic anhydride, with the hydroxy group of the tyrosine being transformed into the trifluoromethyl sufonyl derivative 113 by using phenyl bis[(trifluoromethyl)sulfonyl] amine.
  • Compound 113 this can be coupled to vinyltributyltin in the presence of bis(triphenylphosphine)palladium dichloride and lithium chloride to give the 4-ethenylphenylalanine derivative 114.
  • Example 21 The boronic acids can be further treated with pinanediol to give the corresponding boronate esters shown in Figure 51. These were further acetylated using acetic anhydride, and then coupled to peptides either using a peptide synthesizer or manually to the peptide attached to the resin following standard peptide synthesis schemes using standard conditions. These peptides were cleaved from the resin using 5% water in TFA and further purified by HPLC.

Abstract

The present invention makes available novel compounds useful for inhibiting an interaction between a protein containing an SH2 domain and a phosphotyrosine-containing polypeptide represented by general formula (II).

Description

Inhibitors ofSH2 domain interactions
Background of the Invention
Many of the physiological activities of a cell are controlled by external signals that stimulate or inhibit intracellular events. The process by which an external signal is transmitted into and within a cell to elicit an intracellular response is referred to as signal transduction. Signal transduction is generally initiated by the interaction of extracellular factors (for example, hormones, adhesion molecules, cytokines, and the like) with membrane receptors on the cell surface. These extracellular signals are transduced to the inner face of the cell membrane, where the cytoplasmic domains of receptor molecules make contact with intracellular targets. The initial receptor-target interactions stimulate a cascade of additional molecular interactions involving multiple intracellular pathways that disseminate the signal throughout the cell. These complex, branching pathways coordinate the multifunctional cellular programs that trigger changes in cell behavior. The orcehstration of diverse proteins in finely tuned intracellular pathways appears to require transient "compartmentalization" of the proteins into complexes. Through a series of inducible and reversible protein-protein interactions, regulatory proteins are recruited from soluble cell material to form short-lived protein complexes that relay signals throughout the cell.
The structural nature of these protein interactions is emerging through the identification of the individual proteins that participate in each signal transduction pathway, the elucidation of the temporal order in which these proteins interact, and the definition of the sites of contact between the proteins. X-ray crystallography and nuclear magnetic resonance (NMR) spectroscopy studies have provided detailed structural information on a few of these interactive protein domains.
Many of the proteins involved in signal transduction consist of multiple domains, some of which have enzymatic activity and some of which bind to other cellular proteins, DNA regulatory elements, calcium, nucleotides, or lipid mediators. The discovery that Src homology 2 (SH2) domains provide phosphorylation-dependent and sequence-specific contacts for assembly of receptor signaling complexes has provided a breakthrough in understanding signal transduction (Cantley et al., (1991) Cell 64:281-302; Koch et al. (1991) Science 252:668-674).
Src homology 2 (SH2) domains were first identified from sequence similarities in the noncatalytic regions of Src-related tyrosine kinases, spanning approximately 100 amino acid residues (Sadowski et al. (1986) Mol. Cell. Biol. 6:4396-4408). The subsequent discovery that SH2 domains bind to specific phosphorylated tyrosine residues has provided a link between tyrosine kinases and proteins that respond to tyrosine phosphorylation (for reviews see Koch et al. (1991) Science 252:668-674; Pawson and Gish, (1992) Cell 71:359-362; Mayer and Baltimore, (1993) Trends Cell Biol. 3:8-13). Now a vast number of proteins likely to be involved in signaling have been shown to contain SH2 domains. The transmission of growth factor-mediated signals, for example, depends critically on the sequence-specific recognition of phosphorylated tyrosines by SH2 domains, which have been discovered in a number of proteins that act downstream of growth factor receptors, including Ras GTPase-activating protein (GAP), phosphatidylinositol 3'-kinase (PIK), and phospholipase C-γ (reviewed by Cantley et al. (1991) Cell 64:281-302). SH2 domains serve to localize these proteins to activated receptors and are implicated in the modulation of enzymatic activity (O'Brien et al. (1990) Mol. Cell. Biol. 10:2855-2862; Roussel et al. (1991) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 88:10696-10700; Backer et al. (1992) EMBO J. 11 :3469-3479).
While SH2 domains share the common property of binding phosphotyrosine- containing peptides, additional biological specificity resides in the sequence contexts of the phosphotyrosine. Evidence that the binding of a particular SH2 domain to tyrosine- phosphorylated proteins is dependent on the primary sequence around the phosphotyrosine (pTyr) came from a comparison of the sequences of the regions of polyoma middle T and the platelet-derived growth factor (PDGF) receptor that bind phosphatidylinositol 3-kinase (Cantley et al. (1991) Cell 64:281-302). The sequence pTyr-X-X-Met was found at sites known to be critical for phosphatidylinositol-3-kinase binding to these proteins (Cohen et al. (1990) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. 87:4458-4462; Kazlauskas and Cooper, (1989) Cell 58:1121- 1133; Talmage et al. (1989) Cell 59:55-65; Whitman et al. (1985) Nature 315:239-242), and this sequence has been predictive for other receptors or receptor substrates that bind phosphatidylinositol-3-kinase (Lev et al. (1992) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. 89:678-682; McGlade et al. (1992) Mol. Cell Biol. 12:991-997; Sun et al. (1991) Nature 352:73-77; Reedijk et al. (1992) EMBO J. 11 :1365-1372). Synthetic phosphopeptides based on this sequence have been found to block phosphatidylinositol 3-kinase binding to the PDGF receptor (Escobedo et al. (1991) Mol. Cell. Biol. 11:1125-1132; Fantl et al. (1992) Nature 353:726-730) and to polyoma middle T (Auger et al. (1992) J. Biol. Chem. 267:5408-5415; and Yoakim et al. (1992) J. Virol. 66:5485-5491). In addition, mutational studies have shown that the SH2 domains of phosphatidylinositol 3-kinase, Ras GAP, and PLC-γ recognize distinct phosphopeptide sequence in the PDGF receptor (Fantl et al. (1992) Cell 69:413-423; Kazlauskas et al. (1990) Science 247:1578-1581; (1992) Mol. Cell Biol. 12:2534-2544). Summary of the Invention
One aspect of the present invention makes available novel compounds useful for inhibiting an interaction between a protein containing an SH2 domain and a phophotyrosine- containing polypeptide. In one aspect of the invention, the subject compounds are represented by the general formula α-amino-N-[l-(2-AA-2-oxoethyl)-l-azepin-3-yl]-PTyr (Formula I), wherein PTyr -represents a phosphotyrosine or a phosphotyrosine analog which is carboxy- terminally linked with a 3-amino moiety of the azepine, and AA represents a peptide or single amino acid residue amino-terminally linked through a peptide bond with the 2-oxoethyl moiety of the azepine. The azepine core mimics a dipeptidyl amide backbone, and the PTyr, the azepine, and the AA together form a peptidyl analog of the general formula PTyr-Xaa- Xaa-AA.
In certain embodiments of the present invention, PTyr can further include an additional amino acid residue or peptide, or similar azepine moiety, linked in a peptidyl bond to the N-terminus of the phosphotyrosine in order to further extend the peptidomimetic amino terminally.
The pho iety, pTyr, can be represented by the general formula
Figure imgf000005_0001
,where Y is selected from a group consisting of
Figure imgf000005_0002
, — (CH2)m-BeF3 , and — (CH2)m-AlF3
Figure imgf000005_0003
wherein m is zero or an integer in the range of 1 to 6; X is absent or represents O, S, or N; D] represents O or S; D2 represents N3, SH2, NH2, or NO2; and Rj 5 and R16 each independently represent hydrogen, a lower alkyl, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, or R15 and Rj6 taken together with the O-P-O, O-B-O, O-V-O or O-As-O atoms to which they are attached complete a heterocyclic ring having from 5 to 8 atoms in the ring structure. In a preferred embodiment, pTyr is a non-hydrolyzable phosphotyrosine analog. The jαrα-substituted phenylalanine is also the most preferred.
In certain embodiments, the azepine is preferably a 1 ,4-diazepine, such as a 1,4- benzodiazepine. For instance, the compound can be a derivative of a 3-amino-l-(2- oxoethyl)-l,4-benzodiazepin-2-one, where the phosphotyrosine analog is covalently attached to the benzodiazepine by an amide bond with the 3-amino moiety, and the amino acid residue (or peptide) AA is attached to the benzodiazepine by an amide bond with said 1-oxoethyl moiety. In other embodiments, the peptidomimetic can be synthesized having a 1 -azepine core, such as a 1 -benzoazepine or a 1-pyridinoazepine.
Another aspect of the present invention provides a boronopenyl moiety in a wide range of compounds, the boronophenyl compound represented by the general formula V:
Figure imgf000006_0001
wherein
Y' represents a substitution at one of the meta, ortho or para positions of the phenyl moiety, Y' being a borono given by the general formula
Figure imgf000006_0002
Rj5 and Rjg each independently represent hydrogen, a lower alkyl, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, or Rγ5 and R16 taken together with the O-B-O atoms to which they are attached complete a heterocyclic ring having from 5 to 8 atoms in the ring structure;
R'l4 is absent or represents one or more substituents at remaining ring positions, which substituents are selected from halogens, lower alkyls, lower alkoxys, a hydroxyl, amino, nitro, thiol, amines, imines, amides, carbonyls, carboxyls, silyls, ethers, thioethers, sulfonyls, selenoethers, ketones, aldehydes, esters, or -(CH2)m-R7, -CF3, or -CN
X8 and X9 each, independently, represent a methylene, an ethylene, an acetylene, an amine, a carbonyl, a phosphonyl, a sulfer, an oxygen, or a selenium;
R'l7 is absent, or represents hydrogen, halogens, alkyls, alkenyls, alkynyls, hydroxyl, amino, nitro, thiol, amines, imines, amides, phosphoryls, phosphonates, phosphines, carbonyls, carboxyls, silyls, ethers, thioethers, sulfonyls, selenoethers, ketones, aldehydes, esters, or -(CH2)m-R-7> or R'17 represents an amino acid residue or peptide condensed with
R'3 is absent, or represents hydrogen, halogens, alkyls, alkenyls, alkynyls, hydroxyl, amino, nitro, thiol, amines, imines, amides, phosphoryls, phosphonates, phosphines, carbonyls, carboxyls, silyls, ethers, thioethers, sulfonyls, selenoethers, ketones, aldehydes, esters, or -(CH2)m-R7, or R'3 represents an amino acid residue or peptide condensed with X9;
R7 represents an aryl, a cycloalkyl, a cycloalkenyl, a heterocycle or a polycycle; m, independently for each occurence in formula V, is zero or an integer in the range of 1 to 8; and n is 1, 2 or 3.
In preferred embodiments, this moiety is provided as part of A peptidomimetic. For instance, the peptidomimietic being a peptide or peptide analog including one or more amino acid residues having sidechains represented by the formula:
Figure imgf000007_0001
wherein Y', R15, R^, R'14 and n are as defined above, and the peptidomimetic is at least a dipeptide in length.
The subject peptidomimetics, by selectively binding to a phosphotyrosine binding site of an SH2 domain, can be used to inhibit binding of a protein containing said SH2 domain with a phosphotyrosine residue of a target phosphoprotein. It is thus another aspect of the present invention to utilize the subject peptidomimetics to modulate intracellular signaling pathways by disrupting particular protein-protein interactions mediated by SH2 domains. For instance, the SH2 inhibitors of the present invention can be used to affect the responsiveness of a cell to a growth factor, cytokine or other receptor ligand; as an immunosuppressant; to prevent osteoclastic resorption of bone during osteoporosis; influence differentiation of cells; to modulate cellular response to interactions with the extracellular matrix, as well as affect the production and secretion of extracellular matrix components; prevent viral infection and/or viral-mediated transformation of cells; and to inhibit the proliferation of transformed cells or to render transformed cells more sensitive to cytostatic or cytotoxic agents. The SH2 target of the subject inhibitors can range from the interaction between, for example, an activated receptor complex and the initial cytoplasmic proteins involved in triggering a particular set of intracellular signaling pathways, to the last SH2-mediated interaction in a specific pathway, such as the formation of a transcription factor complex or allosteric regulation of an enzymatic activity. Thus, the inhibitors of the present invention can be used to prevent the interaction between a phosphotyrosine residue and such SH2-containing signal transduction proteins as, for example, Src, Lck, Fps, phosphatidylinositol-3-kinases, ras GTPase-activating protein, Fyn, Lyk, Fgr, Fes, ZAP-70, Abl, Crk, Nek, Sem-5, p85, phospholipase C, SHPTP1, SHPTP2, corkscrew, Syk, Lyn, Yes, Hck, Dsrc, Tec, Atk/Bpk, Itk/Tsk, Arg, Csk, tensin, Vav, She, Emt, Grb2, Syp, Blk, Bpk 113TF, 91TF, and Janus kinases including Tyk2, JAK1 and JAK2.
Brief Description of the Drawings
Figures 1A, IB and 1C illustrate general reaction schemes for generating the subject peptidomimetics having 1 ,4-diazepine cores.
Figures 2A, 2B, 2C, and 2D depict a synthesis scheme for generating a benzodiazepine of the present invention by cyclization of an α-aminoglycine and a 2-amino benzophenone.
Figure 3 shows yet another multistep synthetic approach useful in obtaining the present peptidomimetics, beginning with a 2-aminocyclic ketone.
Figure 4 illustrates a synthetic approach for generating the subject peptidomimetics comprising an azepine core having only one heteratom.
Figures 5 A-5I illustrate the synthesis of p-(boronoalkyl)phenylalanine which can be utilized to generate the boronic acid analogs of phosphotyrosine described herein.
Figure 6 is an autoradiogram of a gel visualizing the ability of a G$>T-fyn fusion protein to bind to phosphorylated polyoma middle T antigen, in the presence and absense of a peptidomimetic of the present invention.
Figure 7 is an inhibition profile illustrating the ability of the subject peptidomimetic to inhibit an lck-SR2 interaction.
Figure 8 illustrates the synthesis of the trans-olefin analog of a YEEI peptide.
Detailed Description of the Invention I. Definitions
For convenience, certain terms employed in the specification, examples, and appended claims are collected here.
The term "alkyl" is recognized in the art and refers to saturated aliphatic groups having one to ten carbon atoms, including straight-chain alkyl groups, branched-chain alkyl groups, cycloalkyl (alicyclic) groups, alkyl substituted cycloalkyl groups, and cycloalkyl substituted alkyl groups. In preferred embodiments, a straight chain or branched chain alkyl has 30 or fewer carbon atoms in its backbone (e.g., C1-C30 for straight chain, C3-C30 for branched chain), and more preferably 20 of fewer. Likewise, preferred cycloalkyls have from 4-10 carbon atoms in their ring structure, and more preferably have 5, 6 or 7 carbons in the ring structure.
Moreover, the term alkyl as used throughout the specification and claims is intended to include both "unsubstituted alkyls" and "substituted alkyls", the latter of which refers to alkyl moieties having substituents replacing a hydrogen on one or more carbons of the hydrocarbon backbone. Such substituents can include, for example, a halogen, a hydroxyl, a carbonyl, an alkoxyl, and ester, a phosphoryl, an amine, an amide, an imine, a thiol, a thioether, a thioester, a sulfonyl, an amino, a nitro, or an organometallic moiety. It will be understood by those skilled in the art that the moieties substituted on the hydrocarbon chain can themselves be substituted, if appropriate. For instance, the substituents of a substituted alkyl may include substituted and unsubstituted forms of amines, imines, amides, phosphoryls (including phosphonates and phosphines), sulfonyls (including sulfates and sulfonates), and silyl groups, as well as ethers, thioethers, selenoethers, carbonyls (including ketones, aldehydes, carboxylates, and esters), -CF3, -CN and the like. Exemplary substitued alkyls are described below. Cycloalkyls can be further substituted with alkyls, alkenyls, alkoxys, thioalkyls, aminoalkyls, carbonyl-substituted alkyls, CF3, CN, and the like.
The terms "alkenyl" and "alkynyl" refer to unsaturated aliphatic groups analogous in length and possible substitution to the alkyls described above, but which contain at least one double or triple bond respectively.
Unless the number of carbons is otherwise specified, "lower alkyl" as used herein means an alkyl group, as defined above, but having from one to ten carbons, more preferably from one to six carbon atoms in its backbone structure. Likewise, "lower alkenyl" and "lower alkynyl" have similar chain lengths. It will be understood that every occurence of "alkyl", "alkenyl" and "alkynyl" in the specification can be replaced, in preferred embodiments, with "lower alkyl", "lower akenyl" and "lower alkynyl", respectively, to reflect C] -CJO aliphates. As used herein, the term "amino" means -NH2; the term "nitro" means -NO2; the term "halogen" designates -F, -Cl, -Br or -I; the term "thiol" means -SH; the term "hydroxyl" means -OH; the term "sulfonyl" means -SO2-; and the term "organometallic" refers to a metallic atom (such as mercury, zinc, lead, magnesium or lithium) or a metalloid (such as silicon, arsenic or selenium) which is bonded directly to a carbon atom, such as a diphenylmethylsilyl group.
Thus, the term "alkylamine" as used herein means an alkyl group, as defined above, having a substituted or unsubstituted amine attached thereto. In exemplary embodiments, an "amine" can be represented by the general formula:
Figure imgf000010_0001
wherein R8 and R9 each independently represent a hydrogen, an alkyl, an alkenyl, -(CH2)m- R7, -C(=O)-alkyl, -C(=O)-alkenyl, -C(=O)-alkynyl, -C(=O)-(CH2)m-R7- or R8 and R9 taken together with the N atom to which they are attached complete a heterocycle having from 4 to 8 atoms in the ring structure; R7 represents an aryl, a cycloalkyl, a cycloalkenyl, a heterocycle or a polycycle; and m is zero or an integer in the range of 1 to 8.
Likewise, the term "alkylamide" refers to an alkyl group having a substituted or unsubstituted amide group attached thereto. For instance, an "amide" can be represented by the general formula:
Figure imgf000010_0002
wherein R8 and R9 are as defined above.
The term "alkylimine" refers to an alkyl group having a substituted or unsubstituted imine attached thereto. An "imine" can be represented by the general formula:
/Rs Re
=N or — N wherein R8 is as described above.
The term "thioalkyl" refers to an alkyl group, as defined above, having a sulfhydryl or thioether group attached thereto. In preferred embodiments, the "thioether" moiety is represented by one of -S-alkyl, -S-alkenyl, -S-alkynyl, and -S-(CH2)m-R7, wherein m and R7 are defined above. The term "carbonyl-substituted alkyl" as used herein means an alkyl group, as defined above, having a substituted or unsubstituted carbonyl group attached thereto, and includes aldehydes, ketones, carboxylates and esters. In exemplary embodiments, the "carbonyl" moiety is represented by the general formula:
O O
— C-X-R10 , or — X-C-R10 wherein X is absent or represents an oxygen or a sulfur, and R10 represents a hydrogen, an alkyl, an alkenyl, or -(CH2)m-R7, where m and R7 are as defined above. Where X is an oxygen, the formula represents an "ester". Where X is a sulfur, the formula represents a "thioester." Where X is absent, and Rj0 is not hydrogen, the above formula represents a "ketone" group. Where the oxygen atom of the above formula is replaced by sulfur, the formula represents a "thiocarbonyl" group.
The terms "alkoxyl" or "alkoxy" as used herein refers to an alkyl group, as defined above, having an oxygen radical attached thereto. Representative alkoxyl groups include methoxy. ethoxy, propoxy, tert-butoxy and the like. An "ether" is two hydrocarbons covalently linked by an oxygen. Accordingly, the substituent of an alkyl which renders that alkyl an ether is or resembles an alkoxyl, such as can be represented by one of -O-alkyl, -O- alkenyl. -O-alkynyl, -O-(CH2)m-R7, where m and R7 are described above.
The term "metalloalkyl" refers to an alkyl group, as defined above, having a substituted or unsubstituted organometallic group attached thereto. A "silyl alkyl" is an alkyl having a substituted silicon attached thereto. In a preferred embodiment, the "silyl" moiety which may be substituted on the alkyl can be represented by the general formula:
Figure imgf000011_0001
wherein Rj0, R'ιo and R"ιo independently represent a hydrogen, an alkyl, an alkenyl. or -(CH2)m-R7, m and R7 being defined above.
Likewise, a "selenoalkyl" refers to an alkyl group having a substituted seleno group attached thereto. Exemplary "selenoethers" which may be substituted on the alkyl are selected from one of -Se-alkyl, -Se-alkenyl, -Se-alkynyl, and -Se-(CH2)m-R7, m and R7 being defined above. The term "sulfonate" as used herein means a sulfonyl group, as defined above, attached to an alkyl or aryl group. Thus, in a preferred embodiment, a sulfonate has the structure :
Figure imgf000012_0001
in which Rj i is an alkyl or an aryl.
Analogous substitutions can be made to alkenyl and alkynyl groups to produce, for example, alkenylamines, alkynylamines, alkenylamides, alkynylamides, alkenylimines, alkynylimines, thioalkenyls, thioalkynyls, carbonyl-substituted alkenyls or alkynyls, alkenoxyls, alkynoxyls, metalloalkenyls and metalloalkynyls.
The term "aryl" as used herein includes 4-, 5-, 6- and 7-membered single-ring aromatic groups which may include from zero to four heteroatoms, for example, benzene, pyrrole, furan, thiophene, imidazole, oxazole, thiazole, triazole, pyrazole, pyridine, pyrazine, pyridazine and pyrimidine, and the like. Those aryl groups having heteroatoms in the ring structure may also be referred to as "aryl heterocycle". The aromatic ring can be substituted at one or more ring positions with such substituents as described above, as for example, halogens, alkyls, alkenyls, alkynyls, hydroxyl, amino, nitro, thiol amines, imines, amides, phosphonates, phosphines, carbonyls, carboxyls, silyls, ethers, thioethers, sulfonyls, selenoethers, ketones, aldehydes, esters, or -(CH2)m-R7, -CF3, -CN, or the like.
The terms "heterocycle" or "heterocyclic group" refer to 4 to 10-membered ring structures, more preferably 5 to 7 membered rings, which ring structures include one to four heteroatoms. Heterocyclic groups include pyrrolidine, oxolane, thiolane, imidazole, oxazole, piperidine. piperazine, morpholine. The heterocyclic ring can be substituted at one or more positions with such substituents as described above, as for example, halogens, alkyls, alkenyls, alkynyls, hydroxyl, amino, nitro, thiol, amines, imines, amides, phosphonates, phosphines, carbonyls, carboxyls, silyls, ethers, thioethers, sulfonyls, selenoethers, ketones, aldehydes, esters, or -(CH2)m-R7, -CF3, -CN, or the like.
The terms "polycycle" or "polycyclic group" refer to two or more cyclic rings (e.g., cycloalkyls, cycloalkenyls, cycloalkynyls, aryls and/or heterocycles) in which two or more carbons are common to two adjoining rings, e.g., the rings are "fused rings". Rings that are joined through non-adjacent atoms are termed "bridged" rings. Each of the rings of the polycycle can be substituted with such substituents as described above, as for example, halogens, alkyls, alkenyls, alkynyls, hydroxyl, amino, nitro, thiol, amines, imines, amides, phosphonates, phosphines, carbonyls, carboxyls, silyls, ethers, thioethers, sulfonyls, selenoethers, ketones, aldehydes, esters, or -(CH2)m-R7, -CF3, -CN, or the like.
The phrase "fused ring " is art recognized and refers to a cyclic moiety which can comprise from 4 to 8 atoms in its ring structure, and can also be substituted or unsubstituted, (e.g., cycloalkyl, a cycloakenyl, an aryl, or a heterocyclic ring) that shares a pair of carbon atoms with the azepine core. For example, in the structure described below
Figure imgf000013_0001
both A and the azepine together form a fused ring system. To illustrate, the fused ring system can be a benzodiazepine, a benzoazepine, a pyrrolodiazepine, a pyrroloazepine, a furanodiazepine, a furanoazepine, a thiphenodiazepine, a thiphenoazepine, an imidazolodiazepine, an imidazoloazepine, an oxazolodiazepine, an oxazoloazepine, a thiazolodiazepine, a thiazoloazepine, a pyrazolodiazepine, a pyrazoloazepine, a pyrazinodiazepine, a pyrazinoazepine, a pyridinodiazepine, a pyridinoazepine, a pyrimidinodiazepine, and a pyrimidinoazepine.
The term "heteroatom" as used herein means an atom of any element other than carbon or hydrogen. Preferred heteroatoms are nitrogen, oxygen, sulpher and selenium.
By the terms "amino acid residue" and "peptide residue" is meant an amino acid or peptide molecule without the -OH of its carboxyl group (C-terminally linked) or the proton of its amino group (N-terminally linked). In general the abbreviations used herein for designating the amino acids and the protective groups are based on recommendations of the IUPAC-IUB Commission on Biochemical Nomenclature (see Biochemistry (1972) 11 :1726- 1732). For instance Met, He, Leu, Ala and Gly represent "residues'Of methionine, isoleucine, leucine, alanine and glycine, respectively. By the residue is meant a radical derived from the corresponding α-amino acid by eliminating the OH portion of the carboxyl group and the H portion of the α-amino group. The term "amino acid side chain" is that part of an amino acid exclusive of the -CH(NH2)COOH portion, as defined by K. D. Kopple, "Peptides and Amino Acids". W. A. Benjamin Inc., New York and Amsterdam, 1966, pages 2 and 33; examples of such side chains of the common amino acids are -CH2CH2SCH3 (the side chain of methionine), -CH2(CH3)-CH2CH3 (the side chain of isoleucine), -CH2CH(CH3)2 (the side chain of leucine) or H-(the side chain of glycine).
For the most part, the amino acids used in the application of this invention are those naturally occurring amino acids found in proteins, or the naturally occurring anabolic or catabolic products of such amino acids which contain amino and carboxyl groups. Particularly suitable amino acid side chains include side chains selected from those of the following amino acids: glycine, alanine, valine, cysteine, leucine, isoleucine, serine, threonine, methionine, glutamic acid, aspartic acid, glutamine, asparagine, lysine, arginine, proline, histidine, phenylalanine, tyrosine, and tryptophan.
However, the term amino acid residue further includes analogs, derivatives and congeners of any specific amino acid referred to herein. For example, the present invention contemplates the use of amino acid analogs wherein a side chain is lengthened or shortened while still providing a carboxyl, amino or other reactive precursor functional group for cyclization, as well as amino acid analogs having variant side chains with appropriate functional groups). For instance, the subject peptidomimetic can include an amino acid analog as for example, β-cyanoalanine, canavanine, djenkolic acid, norleucine, 3- phosphoserine, homoserine, dihydroxyphenylalanine, 5-hydroxytryptophan, 1- methylhistidine, or 3-methylhistidine. Other naturally occurring amino acid metabolites or precursors having side chains which are suitable herein will be recognized by those skilled in the art and are included in the scope of the present invention.
Also included are the D and L stereoisomers of such amino acids when the structure of the amino acid admits of stereoisomeric forms. The configuration of the amino acids and amino acid residues herein are designated by the appropriate symbols D, L or DL, furthermore when the configuration is not designated the amino acid or residue can have the configuration D, L or DL. It will be noted that the structure of some of the compounds of this invention includes asymmetric carbon atoms. It is to be understood accordingly that the isomers arising from such asymmetry are included within the scope of this invention. Such isomers are obtained in substantially pure form by classical separation techniques and by sterically controlled synthesis and have arbitrarily been named, for example, as isomers #1 or #2. For the purposes of this application, unless expressly noted to the contrary, a named amino acid shall be construed to include both the D or L stereoisomers, preferably the L stereoisomer.
The phrase "protecting group" as used herein means substituents which protect the reactive functional group from undesirable chemical reactions. Examples of such protecting groups include esters of carboxylic acids, ethers of alcohols and acetals and ketals of aldehydes and ketones.
The phrase "N-terminal protecting group" or "amino-protecting group" as used herein refers to various amino-protecting groups which can be employed to protect the N-terminus of an amino acid or peptide against undesirable reactions during synthetic procedures. Examples of -suitable groups include acyl protecting groups such as, to illustrate, formyl, dansyl, acetyl, benzoyl, trifluoroacetyl, succinyl and methoxysuccinyl; aromatic urethane protecting groups as, for example, carbonylbenzyloxy (Cbz); and aliphatic urethane protecting groups such as t-butyloxycarbonyl (Boc) or 9-Fluorenylmethoxycarbonyl (FMOC). Peptidomimetics of the present invention which have sidechain or azepine ring substituents which include amino groups -such as where R3 is a lysine or arginine, or where R8, Rj, R2 or Y comprise a free amino group- can optionally comprise suitable N-terminal protecting groups attached to the sidechains.
The phrase "C-terminal protecting group" or "carboxyl-protecting group" as used herein refers to those groups intended to protect a carboxylic acid group, such as the C- terminus of an amino acid or peptide or an acidic or hydroxyl azepine ring substituent, against undesirable reactions during synthetic procedures and includes. Benzyl or other suitable esters or ethers are illustrative of C-terminal protecting groups known in the art.
The terms "phosphotyrosine" and "phosphotyrosine analog", for ease of reading, appear interchangably as a portion of the formula representing the subject peptidomimetics. As used herein, with respect to the appearance in a formula for the present compounds, either term is intended to encompass any phosphotyrosine analog of the general formula:
Figure imgf000015_0001
in which Y is a phosphate group or phosphate analog which can occur in one of the ortho, meta or para positions, though the most preferable is the para. In preferred embodiments, Y is a non-hydrolyzable phosphate analog which is stable under normal physiological conditions. Exemplary choices for the phosphate analog Y include phenylalanine ring substituents represented by the genereal formulas
Figure imgf000016_0001
, — (CH2)m-BeF3 , and — (CH2)m-AIF3
Figure imgf000016_0002
wherein m is zero or an integer in the range of 1 to 6; X represents O, S, or N; Di represents O or S; D2 represents N3, SH2, NH2 or NO2; and R15 and Rjg each independently represent hydrogen, a lower alkyl, or a pharmeceutically acceptable salt, or R15 and Rjg taken together with the O-P-O, O-B-O, O-V-O, or O-As-O atoms to which they are attached complete a heterocyclic ring having from 5 to 8 atoms in the ring structure. In preferred embodiments, Rj5 and Rjg are capable of being hydrolysed to a hydroxyl group, particularly in aqueous solution at physiological pH.
II. Compounds and Preparations thereof
Protein-protein interactions are involved in all stages of the intracellular signal transduction process -at the plasma membrane, where the signal is initiated in the cytoplasm by receptor recruitment of other cellular proteins; in the cytoplasm, where the signals are disseminated to different cellular locations; and in the nucleus, where other proteins involved in transcriptional control form complexes to regulate transcription of particular genes. Accumulating evidence suggests that selected sequences surrounding tyrosine phosphorylation sites can be recognized by proteins containing 5rc-homology 2 (SH2) domains, and that such phosphotyrosine recognition functions to propagate intracellular signals by mediating the formation and/or dissolution of protein complexes. Phosphoprotein recognition by SH2 domain-containing proteins is thought to derive its specificity from the presence of a phosphorylated tyrosine as well as from the surounding amino acid sequence.
The present invention makes available novel compounds useful for binding to and SH2 domain, and/or inhibiting an interaction between a protein containing an SH2 domain and a phophotyrosine-containing polypeptide. In one aspect of the invention, the subject peptidomimetic is represented by the general formula α-amino-N-[l-(2-AA-2-oxoethyl)-l- azepin-3-yl]-PTyr (Formula I), wherein PTyr represents a phosphotyrosine or a phosphotyrosine analog which is carboxy-terminally linked with a 3-amino moiety of the azepine, and AA represents a peptide or single amino acid residue amino-terminally linked through a peptide bond with the 2-oxoethyl moiety of the azepine. The azepine core mimics a dipeptidyl amide backbone, and the PTyr, the azepine, and the AA together form a peptidyl analog of the general formula PTyr-Xaa-Xaa-AA. In certain embodiments of the present invention, PTyr can further include an additional amino acid residue or peptide, or similar azepine moiety, linked in a peptidyl bond to the N-terminus of the phosphotyrosine in order to further extend the peptidomimetic amino terminally.
In an exemplary embodiment, the peptidyl-azepine is represented by (Formula II):
Figure imgf000017_0001
wherein
A represents a fused ring selected from a group consisting of a cycloalkyl, a cycloakenyl, an aryl, and a heterocyclic ring, wherein the fused ring A can comprise from 4 to 8 atoms in its ring structure;
R] represents hydrogen, a halogen, a lower alkyl, a lower alkenyl, a lower alkynyl, a carboxyl, an azido, -(CH2)m-R7, -(CH2)m-OH, -(CH2)m-O-lower alkyl, -(CH2)m-O-lower alkenyl, -(CH2)n-O-(CH2)m-R7, -(CH2)m-SH, -(CH2)m-S-lower alkyl, -(CH2)m-S-lower alkenyl, -(CH2)n-S-(CH2)m-R7,
Figure imgf000017_0002
O O O
— (CH2)m-C-lower alkyl ? — (CH2)m-C-lower alkenyl , — (CH2)m-C-Y ,
O O
— (CH2)n-C-(CH2)rirR7 , or — (CH2)m-C-O-R6 ;
R represents an electron lone pair, hydrogen, an lower alkyl, an lower alkenyl, an lower alkynyl, a carboxyl, -(CH2)m-R7, -(CH2)m-OH, -(CH2)m-O-lower alkyl, -(CH2)m-O- lower alkenyl, -(CH2)n-O-(CH2)m-R7, -(CH2)p-SH, -(CH2)p-S-lower alkyl, -(CH2)p-S-lower alkenyl, -(CH2)p-S-(CH2)m-R7, — (CH2) - N
Figure imgf000018_0001
O O O
— (CH2)m-C-lower alkyl , — (CH2)m-C-lower alkenyl , — (CH2)m-C-Y ,
O O
(CH2) n-C-(CH2)nrR7 , or — (CH2)m-C-O-R6 ;
R3 represents an N-terminally linked amino acid residue or peptide;
R and R5 each independently represent hydrogen, lower alkyl, lower alkenyl, -(CH2)m-R7, -C(O)-lower alkyl, -C(O)-lower alkenyl, -C(O)-(CH2)m-R7, or R4 and R5 taken together with the N atom to which they are attached complete a heterocyclic ring having from 4 to 8 atoms in the ring structure;
R6 represents hydrogen, a lower alkyl, a lower alkenyl, R7, -(CH2)p-R7, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt forming ion;
R7 represents an aryl, a cycloalkyl, a cycloakenyl, or a heterocycle;
R8 represents hydrogen, a halogen, a lower alkyl, a lower alkenyl, a lower alkynyl, a carboxyl, an azido, -(CH2)m-R7, -(CH2)m-OH, -(CH2)m-O-lower alkyl, -(CH2)m-O-lower alkenyl, -(CH2)n-O-(CH2)m-R7, -(CH2)m-SH, -(CH2)m-S-lower alkyl, -(CH2)m-S-lower alkeny
Figure imgf000018_0002
O O O
— (CH2)m-C-lower alkyl , — (CH2)m-C-lower alkenyl , — (CH2)m-C-Y ,
O O
— (CH2)n-C-(CH2)rfrR7 , or — (CH2)m-C-O-R6 ;
R9 is absent, hydrogen, or a lower alkyl; Rj3 represents hydrogen, or a lower alkyl;
Rl4 is absent or represents one or more substitutions with a halogen, a lower alkyl, a lower alkoxy, a lower alkylthio, -NO . -CF3, -CN, and -OH;
Rj7 is absent or represents a C-terminally linked amino acid residue or peptide; X represents O or S; Y represents hydrogen, a lower alkyl, -(CH2)m-OH, -(CH2)m-O- lower alkyl, a carboxyl, an amine, an amide, a nitrosyl, a sulfhydryl, a sulfonyl, or a sulfonamide;
Z represents C or N;
P-Tyr represents a phosphotyrosine, or a phosphotyrosine analog, the carboxyl group of said phosphotyrosine being linked by an amide bond to the 3-amino group of said azepine; and n is zero or an integer in the range of 1 to 6; m is zero or an integer in the range of 1 to 6; and p is an integer in the range of 1 to 6.
Moreover, the subject peptidomimetic can be tethered to form polymers, preferably homodimers or heterodimers. Such molecules can be useful to, for example, bring two or more SH2 containing proteins into proximity. Alternatively, the specificity of the peptidomimetic can be increased in a manner analogous to antibody avidity, by virtue of its ability to bind two SH2 domains on the same protein, be they similar or dissimilar in specificity. Thus, the tethers can be formed, as for instance, any one of the sidechains Rj, R2, R8, R9, or Rj4 being a covalent bridge between two or more azepine cores.
Furthermore, the substitutions of the azepines can provide a cross-linking agent for covalently or non-covalently immobilizing the mimetic on an insoluble matrix, e.g., to purify SH2 proteins. The mimetic can also provide a detectable label, such as radiolabel or fluorogenic label, or biotin, streptavidin or the like, for detecting the presence of the mimetic.
As used herein, the definition of each expression, e.g. lower alkyl, m, n, p, etc., when it occurs more than once in any structure, is intended to be independent of its definition elsewhere in the same structure.
In preferred embodiments, the fused ring A is selected from a group consisting of benzene, pyrrole, furan, thiphene, imidazole, oxazole, thiazole, triazole, pyrazole, pyrroine, pyridine. pyrazine, pyridazine and pyrimidine, and the like. The fused ring A can be substituted, for example, by any of a halogen, a lower alkyl, a lower alkoxy, a lower alkylthio. -NO , -CF3, -CN, and -OH. Though it will be understood that in some instances it may be undesirable to have a substituent, such as a halogen or a nitro group, in the 7 position (particularly wherein A is a benzyl ring) as such substituents are generally required for sedative-hypnotic activity in other benzodiazpines, such as daizepam or nitrazepam.
Likewise, in preferred, yet optional, embodiments, Rj is particularly selected from a group consisting of -(CH2)m-benzyl, -(CH2)n-S-(CH2)m-benzyl, -(CH2)n-O-(CH2)m-benzyl, -(CH2)m-pyridyl, -(CH2)n-S-(CH2)m-pyridyl, and -(CH2)π-O-(CH2)m-pyridyl. Additionally, each of the benzyl and pyridyl moieties can be substituted at one or more positions with a halogen, a lower alkyl, a lower alkoxy, a lower alkylthio, -NO2, -CF3, -CN, and -OH. The choice of R], as well as the other substituents of the azepine peptidomimetic, can effect the solubulity, as well as membrane partioning of the subject peptidomimetics. For instance, as a result of their pyridyl-substituted nature, pyridyl containing Rj substituents can exhibit a greater water solubility than the analogous benzyl-substituted azepines.
In illustrative embodiments, R3 can be an amino acid selected from a group consisting of leucine, isoleucine, methionine, proline, valine, aspartic acid, and asparagine. These exemplary peptidomimetic agents can be used to inhibit the phosphotyrosine binding of such SH2 domain-containing proteins as Src, Lck, Fps, phosphatidylinositol-3-kinases, ras GTPase-activating protein, Fyn, Lyk, Fgr, Fes, ZAP-70, Abl, Crk, Nek, Sem-5, p85, phospholipase C, SHPTP1, SHPTP2, corkscrew, Syk, Lyn, Yes, Hck, Dsrc, Tec, Atk/Bpk, Itk/Tsk, Arg, Csk, tensin, Vav, She, Emt, Grb2, Syp, Blk, Bpk 113TF, 91TF, and Janus kinases including Tyk2, JAK1 and JAK2.
In an exemplary embodiment, the peptidomimetic of the present invention is a benzodiazepine represented by the general formula (formula III):
Figure imgf000020_0001
wherein
Rj represents hydrogen, a halogen, a lower alkyl, a lower alkenyl, a lower alkynyl, a carboxyl, an azido, -(CH2)m-R7, -(CH2)m-OH, -(CH2)m-O-lower alkyl, -(CH2)m-O-lower alkenyl, -(CH2)n-O-(CH2)m-R7, -(CH2)m-SH, -(CH2)m-S-lower alkyl, -(CH2)m-S-lower alkenyl, -(CH2)n-S-(CH2)m-R7,
Figure imgf000021_0001
O O O
— (CH2)m-C-lower alkyl , — (CH2)m-C-lower alkenyl , — (CH2)m-C-Y ,
O O
— (CH2)n-C-(CH2)ri R7 , or — (CH2)m-C-O-R6 ;
R and R5 each independently represent hydrogen, lower alkyl, lower alkenyl, -(CH2)m-R7, -C(O)-lower alkyl, -C(O)-lower alkenyl, -C(O)-(CH2)m-R7, or R4 and 5 taken together with the N atom to which they are attached complete a heterocyclic ring having from 4 to 8 atoms in the ring structure;
Rg represents hydrogen, a lower alkyl, an lower alkenyl, -(CH2)m-R7, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt forming ion;
R7 represents an aryl, a cycloalkyl, a cycloakenyl, or a heterocycle;
Rg represents hydrogen, a halogen, a lower alkyl, a lower alkenyl, a lower alkynyl, a carboxyl, an azido, -(CH2)m-R7, -(CH2)m-OH, -(CH2)m-O-lower alkyl, -(CH2)m-O-lower alkenyl, -(CH2)n-O-(CH2)m-R7, -(CH2)m-SH, -(CH2)m-S-lower alkyl, -(CH2)m-S-lower alkenyl, -(CH2)n-S-(CH2)m-R7,
(CH2)m-N 2
Figure imgf000021_0002
O O O
— (CH2)m-C-lower alkyl , — (CH2)m-C-lower alkenyl , — (CH2)m-C-Y ,
O O
— (CH2)n-C-(CH2)rir-R7 , or — (CH2)m-C-O-R6 ;
RjO represents an alpha-carbon sidechain of an amino acid residue or analog thereof;
Rj 1 represents COOH or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, or a carboxy- terminal blocking group;
R]2 represents NH2 or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, an amino-terminal blocking group, or -NH-Rι7;
Rj4 represents one or more substituent selected from the group consisting of a halogen, a lower alkyl, a lower alkoxy, a lower alkylthio, -NO2, -CF3, -CN, and -OH; R17 represents a C-terminally linked amino acid residue or peptide;
Y represents a phosphate or phosphate analog;
Xj represents O or S; X2 represents hydrogen, a lower alkyl, -(CH )m-OH, -(CH2)m- O-lower alkyl, a carboxyl, an amine, an amide, a nitrosyl, a sulfhydryl, a sulfonyl, or a sulfonamide; n is zero or an integer in the range of 1 to 6; m is zero or an integer in the range of 1 to 6; and p is an integer in the range of 1 to 6.
For instance, the peptidomimetic can be a 5-benzyl substituted 1 ,4-diazepine represented by the general formula (formula IV):
Figure imgf000022_0001
wherein Rg represents hydrogen or an alpha-carbon sidechain of an amino acid residue or amino acid analog; RJQ represents an alpha-carbon sidechain of an amino acid residue or amino acid analog; R] j represents COOH or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, or a carboxy-terminal blocking group; Rj2 represents NH2 or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, or an amino-terminal blocking group; and Y represents a phosphate or phosphate analog.
In preferred, though exemplary embodiments, the subject compound is represented by one of the following formulas:
(1) l,3-Dihydro-l-[(L-isoleucyl)-carbonylmethyl)-5-phenyl-3(R,S)-{[(N-acetyl)- phosphono-L-tyrosyl]amino}-2H-l,4-benzodiazepin-2-one
(2) l,3-Dihydro-l-[(L-methionyl)-carbonylmethyl)-5-phenyl-3(R,S)-{[(N-acetyl)- phosphono-L-tyrosyl] amino } -2H- 1 ,4-benzodiazepin-2-one
(3) l,3-Dihydro-l-[(L-leucyl)-carbonylmethyl)-5-phenyl-3(R,S)-{[(N-acetyl)-phosphono- L-tyrosyl]amino}-2H-l,4-benzodiazepin-2-one (4) l,3-Dihydro-l-[(L-prolyl)-carbonylmethyl)-5-phenyl-3(R,S)-{[(N-acetyl)-phosphono- L-tyrosyl]amino}-2H-l,4-benzodiazepin-2-one
(5) 1 ,3-Dihydro-l -[(L-valyl)-carbonylmethyl)-5-phenyl-3(R,S)-{ [(N-acetyl)-phosphono- L-tyrosyl]amino}-2H-l,4-benzodiazepin-2-one
(6) 1 ,3-Dihydro-l -[(L-aspartyl)-carbonylmethyl)-5-phenyl-3(R,S)-{ [(N-acetyl)- phosphono-L-tyrosyl]amino}-2H-l,4-benzodiazepin-2-one
(7) l,3-Dihydro-l-[(L-asparginyl)-carbonylmethyl)-5-phenyl-3(R,S)-{[(N-acetyl)- phosphono-L-tyrosyl]amino}-2H-l,4-benzodiazepin-2-one
(8) 1 ,3 -Dihydro- 1 - [(L-isoleucyl)-carbonylmethyl)-5-phenyl-3 (R,S)- { [(N-acetyl)-4- boronylphenylalaninejamino } -2H- 1 ,4-benzodiazepin-2-one
(9) l,3-Dihydro-l-[(L-methionyl)-carbonylmethyl)-5-phenyl-3(R,S)-{[(N-acetyl)-4- boronylphenylalanine]amino}-2H-l,4-benzodiazepin-2-one
(10) l,3-Dihydro-l-[(L-leucyl)-carbonylmethyl)-5-phenyl-3(R,S)-{[(N-acetyl)-4- boronylphenylalanine]amino}-2H-l,4-benzodiazepin-2-one
(11) l,3-Dihydro-l-[(L-prolyl)-carbonylmethyl)-5-phenyl-3(R,S)-{[(N-acetyl)-4- borony lpheny lalanine] amino } -2H- 1 ,4-benzodiazepin-2-one
(12) l,3-Dihydro-l-[(L-valyl)-carbonylmethyl)-5-phenyl-3(R,S)-{[(N-acetyl)-4- boronylphenylalanine]amino}-2H-l,4-benzodiazepin-2-one
(13) l,3-Dihydro-l-[(L-aspartyl)-carbonylmethyl)-5-phenyl-3(R,S)-{[(N-acetyl)-4- boronylphenylalanine] amino } -2H- 1 ,4-benzodiazepin-2-one
(14) l,3-Dihydro-l-[(L-asparginyl)-carbonylmethyl)-5-phenyl-3(R,S)-{[(N-acetyl)-4- boronylphenylalanine]amino}-2H-l,4-benzodiazepin-2-one
(15) l,3-Dihydro-l-[(L-isoleucyl)-carbonylmethyl)-5-phenyl-3(R,S)-{[(N-acetyl)-4- arsenylphenylalanine]amino}-2H-l,4-benzodiazepin-2-one
(16) l,3-Dihydro-l-[(L-methionyl)-carbonylmethyl)-5-phenyl-3(R,S)-{[(N-acetyl)-4- arseny lpheny lalanine] amino } -2H- 1 ,4-benzodiazepin-2-one
(17) 1 ,3-Dihydro- 1 -[(L-leucyl)-carbonylmethyl)-5-phenyl-3(R,S)- { [(N-acetyl)-4- arseny lpheny lalanine] amino } -2H- 1 ,4-benzodiazepin-2-one
(18) l,3-Dihydro-l-[(L-prolyl)-carbonylmethyl)-5-phenyl-3(R,S)-{[(N-acetyl)-4- arsenylphenylalanine]amino}-2H-l,4-benzodiazepin-2-one
(19) l,3-Dihydro-l-[(L-valyl)-carbonylmethyl)-5-phenyl-3(R,S)-{[(N-acetyl)-4- arsenylphenylalanine]amino}-2H-l,4-benzodiazepin-2-one
(20) 1 ,3-Dihydro-l -[(L-aspartyl)-carbonylmethyl)-5-phenyl-3(R,S)-{ [(N-acetyl)-4- arsenylphenylalanine]amino}-2H-l,4-benzodiazepin-2-one
(21 ) 1 ,3-Dihydro-l -[(L-asparginyl)-carbonylmethyl)-5-phenyl-3(R,S)-{ [(N-acetyl)-4- arsenylphenylalanine]amino}-2H-l,4-benzodiazepin-2-one
(22) l,3-Dihydro-l-[(L-isoleucyl)-carbonylmethyl)-5-phenyl-3(R,S)-{[(N-acetyl)-4- phosphonomethylphenylalanine]amino}-2H-l,4-benzodiazepin-2-one (23) l,3-Dihydro-l-[(L-methionyl)-carbonylmethyl)-5-phenyl-3(R,S)-{[(N-acetyl)-4- phosphonomethylphenylalanine]amino } -2H- 1 ,4-benzodiazepin-2-one
(24) l,3-Dihydro-l-[(L-leucyl)-carbonylmethyl)-5-ρhenyl-3(R,S)-{[(N-acetyl)-4- phosphonomethylphenylalaninejamino } -2H- 1 ,4-benzodiazepin-2-one
(25) l,3-Dihydro-l-[(L-prolyl)-carbonylmethyl)-5-phenyl-3(R,S)-{[(N-acetyl)-4- phosphonomethylphenylalaninejamino } -2H- 1 ,4-benzodiazepin-2-one
(26) l,3-Dihydro-l-[(L-valyl)-carbonylmethyl)-5-phenyl-3(R,S)-{[(N-acetyl)-4- phosphonomethy lpheny lalanine] amino } -2H- 1 ,4-benzodiazepin-2-one
(27) l,3-Dihydro-l-[(L-aspartyl)-carbonylmethyl)-5-phenyl-3(R,S)-{[(N-acetyl)-4- phosphonomethylphenylalaninejamino } -2H- 1 ,4-benzodiazepin-2-one
(28) l,3-Dihydro-l-[(L-asparginyl)-carbonylmethyl)-5-phenyl-3(R,S)-{[(N-acetyl)-4- phosphonomethylphenylalaninejamino } -2H- 1 ,4-benzodiazepin-2-one
(29) l,3-Dihydro-l-[(L-isoleucyl)-carbonylmethyl)-5-phenyl-3(R,S)-{[(N-acetyl)-4- vanady lpheny lalanine] amino } -2H- 1 ,4-benzodiazepin-2-one
(30) l,3-Dihydro-l-[(L-methionyl)-carbonylmethyl)-5-phenyl-3(R,S)-{[(N-acetyl)-4- vanady lpheny lalanine] amino } -2H- 1 ,4-benzodiazepin-2-one
(31) l,3-Dihydro-l-[(L-leucyl)-carbonylmethyl)-5-phenyl-3(R,S)-{[(N-acetyl)-4- vanadylphenylalaninejamino } -2H- 1 ,4-benzodiazepin-2-one
(32) l,3-Dihydro-l-[(L-prolyl)-carbonylmethyl)-5-phenyl-3(R,S)-{[(N-acetyl)-4- vanadylphenylalanine]amino}-2H-l,4-benzodiazepin-2-one
(33) l,3-Dihydro-l-[(L-valyl)-carbonylmethyl)-5-phenyl-3(R,S)-{[(N-acetyl)-4- vanadylphenylalaninejamino } -2H- 1 ,4-benzodiazepin-2-one
(34) l,3-Dihydro-l-[(L-aspartyl)-carbonylmethyl)-5-phenyl-3(R,S)-{[(N-acetyl)-4- vanady lpheny lalanine] amino } -2H- 1 ,4-benzodiazepin-2-one
(35) l,3-Dihydro-l-[(L-asparginyl)-carbonylmethyl)-5-phenyl-3(R,S)-{[(N-acetyl)-4- vanadylphenylalanine] amino } -2H- 1 ,4-benzodiazepin-2-one
As noted above, certain peptidomimetics of the present invention may exist in particular geometric or stereoisomeric forms. The present invention contemplates all such compounds, including cis- and trans-isomers, R- and S-enantiomers, diastereomers, d- isomers, 1 -isomers, the racemic mixtures thereof, and other mixtures thereof, as falling within the scope of the invention. Additional asymmetric carbon atoms may be present in a substituent such as an alkyl group. All such isomers, as well as mixtures thereof, are intended to be included in this invention.
If, for instance, a particular enantiomer of a compound of the present invention is desired, it may be prepared by asymmetric synthesis, or by derivation with a chiral auxiliary, where the resulting diastereomeric mixture is separated and the auxiliary group cleaved to provide the pure desired enantiomer. Alternatively, where the molecule contains a basic functional group, such as amino, or an acidic functional group, such as carboxyl, diastereomeric salts are formed with an appropriate optically-active acid or base, followed by resolution of the diastereomers thus formed by fractional crystallization or chromatographic means well known in the art, and subsequent recovery of the pure enantiomers.
The pharmaceutical acceptable salts of the subject peptidomimetics include the conventional nontoxic salts or quaternary ammonium salts of the compounds, e.g., from non¬ toxic organic or inorganic acids. For example, such convential nontoxic salts include those derived from inorganic acids such as hydrochloride, hydrobromic, sulfuric, sulfamic, phosphoric, nitric, and the like; and the salts prepared from organic acids such as acetic, propionic, succinic, glycolic, stearic, lactic, malic, tartaric, citric, ascorbic, pamoic, maleic, hydroxymaleic, phenylacetic, glutamic, benzoic, salicyclic, sulfanilic, 2-acetoxybenzoic, fumaric, toluenesulfonic, methanesulfonic, ethane disulfonic, oxalic, isethionic, and the like.
The pharmaceutically acceptable salts of the present invention can be synthesized from the subject peptidomimetic which contain a basic or acid moiety by conventional chemical methods. Generally, the salts are prepared by reacting the free base or acid with stoichiometric amounts or with an excess of the desired salt-forming inorganic or organic acid or base in a suitable solvent. The pharmaceutically acceptable salts of the acids of the subject peptidomimtrics are also readily prepared by conventional procedures such as treating an acid of Formula I with an appropriate amount of a basem such as an alkali or alkaline earth methal hydroxide (e.g. sodium, potassium, lithium, calcium or magnesium) or an organic base such as an amine, piperidine, pyrrolodine, benzylamine and the like, or a quaternary ammonium hydroxide sauch as tetramethylammonium hydroxide and the like.
Contemplated equivalents of the compounds described in Formula I include compounds which otherwise correspond thereto, and which have the same general properties thereof (e.g. the ability to inhibit an SH2-phosphotyrosine interaction), wherein one or more simple variations of substituents are made which do not adversely affect the efficacy of the compound in inhibiting the interaction of an SH2 domain with a phosphotyrosine-containing polypeptide. In general, the peptidomimetics of the present invention may be prepared by the methods illustrated in the general reaction schemes shown in Figures 1-5, or by modifications thereof, using readily available starting materials, reagents and conventional synthesis procedures. In these reactions, it is also possible to make use of variants which are in themselves known, but are not mentioned here. Owing to their extensive use as antagonists of cholecystokinin, the synthesis of many variants of the azepine core structure, particularly of the benzodiazepines, is generally known in the art (see, for example, Evans et al. U.S. Patent No. 4,820,834; Bock et al. U.S. Patent No. 4,755,508; Freidinger et al. U.S. Patent No. 5,206,237; Bock et al. U.S. Patent No. 5,175,159; Bock et al. U.S. Patent No. 4,628,084; Bock et al. (1987) J. Org. Chem. 52:3232-3239; Evans et al. (1988) J. Med. Chem. 31 :2235- 2246; Evans et al. (1987) J. Med. Chem. 30:1229-1239; Bock et al. (1987) Tetrahedron 28:939-949; Stembach et al. (1962) J Org Chem 27:3788; Reider et al. (1987) J Org Chem 52:957; and Rodriquez et al. in Peptides: Chemistry and Biology, G.R. Marshall ed., ESCOM Publisher: Leiden, Netherlands, 1988).
In each of the reaction schemes resulting in 1 ,4-diazepine cores, a 2-aminocyclic ketone, shown generally as compound 1 in Figure 1A, is used to generate the fused-ring diazepine core of the present peptide analogs. Figure 1A, for example, illustrates the coupling of an amino acid analog to the 2-amino group of 5 by conventional peptide coupling techniques. In the preferred synthetic route of Figure 1A, the aminocyclic ketone is coupled to an N-protected amino acid 9A (such as a Boc-glycine or Boc-alanine) using dicyclohexylcarbodiimide (DCC) or other conventional peptide coupling reagent (method A). The product 8 is N-deprotected by treatment with acid, preferably anhydrous HC1 in ethyl acetate in instances wherein the protecting group is a BOC protecting group, to give the α- aminoacyl derivative 7 of the aminocyclic ketone. An another route to synthesize 7 involves the basic synthetic approach (method B) of treating the ketone 5 with the amino acid chloride hydrochloride 9_B, prepared from the amino acid with, for instance, PCl5-AcCl.
Treatment of this aminoacyl derivative 7 with base, preferably aqueous sodium hydroxide in methanol, gives the free base, which can be subsequently cyclized to the 1 ,4- diazepine 6_ upon stirring with methanolic base (Evans et al. (1987) J Med Chem 30:1229- 1239; and Evans et al. U.S. Patent No. 4,820,834).
Alternatively, compound ≤ can be obtained by heating the ketone 5 with the amino acid ester 2C, such as alanine or glycine methyl ester hydrochloride, in refluxing pyridine (method C; c.f. Evans et al. (1987) J Med Chem 30:1229-1239; and Stembach et al. (1962) J Org Chem 27:3788).
The 3,5-disubsituted diazepine 6 can be treated with sodium hydride in dimethyl formamide (DMF), followed by an alkyl halide RQX (e.g., RQ = -CH(-R8)-C(O)-R3, or -CH(- Rg)-CO tBu), to yield the 1 -alkyl derivative 10. This or the parent 1 -unsubstituted compound 6 can be reduced to give the corresponding 4,5-dicyclo compounds ϋ, such as by treatment with sodium cyanoborohydride and acetic acid at 15°C (R9=H), or by treatment with alkyl magnesium halides (e.g. R9MgX ; R9= a lower alkyl), such as methylmagnesium iodide, to produce a disubstituted C5. Compound H can subsequently be alkylated on N by treatment with an alkyl halide (e.g. R2X) or dialkyl sulfate. Alternatively, the 4,5-dihydro compounds can be acylated on N4 by treatment with acyl halides or anhydrides, preferably in the presence of base such as triethylamine.
The 2-thione 12 can be prepared from the parent amide (e.g., any of compounds 6, 10, or 11) by treatment with P2S5 or Lawesson's reagent (2,4-Bis-(4-methoxyphenyl)-2,4- dithioxo-l,3,2,4-dithiadi-phosphetane) according to published procedures (Scheibye et al. (1973) Bull Soc Chim Belg. 87:229). Desulfurization over Raney nickel of the thione 12 can be used to prepare the 2-unsubstituted diazepine H. The latter may be alkylated with alkyl halide or sulfate, acylated with acylhalide or an hydride, reduced with sodium cyanoborohydride, or substituted with alkylmagnesium halide as described for 6 above.
Further substitutions at C2 can be carried out, for example, by treatment of the 2- thione Y2 with an alcohol or an amine in solvent, preferably tetrahydrofuran, in the presence of a mercury salt, such as mercuric chloride or mercuric acetate, to produce the 2-substituted diazepine 18 (Figure 1C). Alternatively, the 2-thione 12 can be converted to the thioiminoether 12 with an alkylating agent, preferably a lower alkyl halide or cycloalkyl halide, at room temperature under phase transfer conditions requiring aqueous base (such as an alkali earth hydroxide), an organic solvent immiscible with water (e.g. toluene), and a catalyst (e.g. tetra-n-butylammonium hydrogen sulfate). The thioiminoether 19 can, in turn, be transformed to the 2-substituted compound 1 by reaction with an amine or alcohol for 2- 96 hours, such as in a sealed pressure vessel at 80-250°C.
The 3 -amino substituted diazepine 16. can be prepared by well known procedures. For example. Figure IB illustrates that the 3 -unsubstituted diazepine 1Q (R-H) can be treated with a suitable base, such as potassium t-butoxide (K-tBu), followed by a nitrosylating agent, such as isoamyl nitrate, to yield the oxime 15. Reduction of the oxime, such as by treatment with Raney nickel, produces the 3 -amino diazepine 16. Other exemplary methods for generating the 3-amino derivatives are described below with reference to Figures 2B and C, and Figure 3. Referring further to Figure IB, the 3-amino substituted diazepine 16 can be derivatized with a phosphotyrosine or phosphotyrosine analog (collectively referred to hereinafter as "pTyr") to yield the 3-amide substituted compound 17. For example, the diazepine 16 can be alkylated by treatment with a pTyr halide 2 OB. Alternatively, the 3- amino 16 can be reacted with an N-protected phosphotyrosine 20A and a coupling reagent such as DCC, EDC, or isobutyl chloroformate.
In an exemplary embodiment of the present invention, the synthesis of the subject peptidomimetic can be accomplished by the cyclization of an α-aminoglycine and a 2-amino benzophenone. As illustrated in Figure 2A, the synthesis of α-isopropylthio-N-benzyloxy- carbonylglycine can be obtained in two steps from glyoxic acid, benzyl carbamate, and 2- propanethiol according to the methods described by Zoller et al. (1975) Tetrahedron 31:863. Briefly, as described in the Examples below, a mixture of benzyl carbamate and glyoxylic acid is stirred in dry ether to yield α-hydrozy-N-benzyloxycarbonylglycine (22 A). Addition of 2-propanethiol to a suspension of 22A in glacial acetic acid containing concentrated sulfuric acid as a catalyst yields the α-isopropylthio-N-benzyloxycarbonyl-glycine 22B.
The protected α-aminoglycine synthon 22B thus formed can be converted to the corresponding mixed anhydride with an alkyl chloroformate in the presence of a tertiary amine, and reacted in situ with a 2-aminocyclic ketone to yield a 1,4-diazepine. In accordance with the process illustrated in Figure 2B, the aminoglycine 22B is dissolved in an aprotic solvent such as methylene chloride (CH2C12) and the resulting solution cooled to about 0°C. This solution is then mixed with an equimolar amount of N-methylmorpholine (NMM) and a similar amount of alky isobutyl chloroformate (iBuOCOCl), and the reaction mixture maitained at a temperature of 0°C for approximately 15 minutes. To the resulting reaction mixture containing the mixed anhydride of 22B is then added dropwise an equimolar amount of the 2-aminobenzophenone 21* The reaction mixture is then allowed to warm to 25°C, and is stirred for about 18 hours at that temperature or heated up to about 55°C for 2.5 hours to insure complete acylation reactions. This crude reaction mixture is then washed with aqueous citric acid, aqueous sodium bicarbonate solution and brine and after drying, the solvent removed by evaporation under reduced pressure, leaving the acylated product 24.
In accordance with the second step of the synthesis of the diazepine, the thioether substituent of 24 is first replaced with an amino group by treatment with excess ammonia in the presence of added mercury or silver salts to form intermediate 25. The solvent and salts are removed and the crude reaction product is cyclized in acetic acid containing ammonium acetate to produce the benzodiazepine 26. In a preferred embodiment, the thioether 24 is dissolved in tetrahydrofuran (THF) or other solvent inert under the reaction conditions and solution saturated with ammonia gas. A slight molar excess of mecuric chloride is added and a stream of ammonia gas passed into the reaction mixture for a period of 1 -5 hours under ambient temperatures (e.g. 25°C). The suspended solids and the solvent is then removed and the residual oily product is dissolved in excess acetic acid containing approximately 5 g ammonium acetate/100 ml acetic acid. The resulting solution is then protected from moisture and heated at 55°C for 2.5 hours or stirred at 25°C for 18 hours to produce the desired product, the N-protected 3 -amino diazepine 26, which is recovered as a solid by evaporation under reduced pressure and partitioning the residual material containing the desired product between ethyl acetate and IN sodium hydroxide solution. Figure 2C depicts a preferred synthesis scheme for condensing amino acid residues with the diazepine core. 26 is alkylated at Nj by treatment with sodium hydride and a halogenated alkyl ester, such as bromoethyl ethyl ester, in DMF, to form the 1 -substituted ester 22. Subsequently, the ester can be saponified to yield the free carboxylic acid 22, which is then derivatized with an amino acid residue or peptide utilizing conventional peptide synthesis methods (see, for example, Barney and Merrifield, in The Peptides, E. Gross and J. Meienhofer, Eds. (Academic Press, New York, 1980), Vol. 2, pp. 1-284). For example, as depicted in Figure 2C, the carboxyl intermediate 22 can be reacted with a c-protected isoleucine (e.g. isoleucine methyl ester) and a coupling reagent (isobutyl chloroformate) in NMM, to yield the 1 -(2-isoleucinyl-2-oxoethyl)-diazepine 10.
In similar fashion, the diazepine 30 can be coupled with a phosphotyrosine analog, or a peptide having a carboxyl phosphotyrosine analog residue, utilizing standard peptide coupling protocols. For instance, the deprotection of the 3-amino moiety of 0 by removal of the benzyloxycarbonyl protecting group can be carried out under transfer hydrogenation conditions in methanol-aqueous formic acid to yield a formate salt of 10. The free amine 31 can be isolated after neutralization of the salt with sodium carbonate solution (10%) in ethyl acetate, and subsequently reacted with the N-protected (FMOC) phosphotyrosine analog in the presence of isobutyl chloroformate and N-methylmorpholine in tetrahydroturin, to yield the N-[2,3-dihydro-l-(2-methionyl-2-oxoethyl)-l ,4-azepin-3-yl-2-one]-phosphotyrosine 12-
Removal of the FMOC protecting group, such as with HC1, provides the hydrochloride salts of the diasteromeric amide 12- The desired isomer can then be isolated, as for example, by crystalization.
Furthermore, Figure 2C illustrates that the 3 -amino moiety can be modified, such as by addition of a lower alkyl group (e.g. methyl). For example, the CBZ-protected amino moiety of the 22 can be methylated by treatment with sodium hydride and iodomethane in DMF to afford the 3-methyamine 28.
In yet another embodiment, a synthetic approach useful in obtaining the present peptidomimetics comprises the multistep sequence shown in Figure 3. This overall synthetic sequence is adequate for initial small-scale synthesis of a wide range of diazepines in order to investigate the inhibitory activity of a number of variants of a series of diazepine core structures in a high throughput screen as described below. Beginning with the 2-aminocyclic ketone 40, the iodoacetamide derivative 42 can be obtained by treatment with chloroacetyl chloride, followed by sodium iodide in acetone (Stembach et al. (1962) J. Org. Chem. 27:3788). Treatment of 42 with ammonium hydroxide produces the intermediate 43, which can be cyclized by, for example, heating, to produce the diazepine core structure 44 (Bell et al. (1964) J. Hetrocyl. Chem 4:647; Hirai et al. (1980) J. Med. Chem. 24:20; and Bock et al. U.S. Patent No. 4,628,084). The 3-chloro-substituted diazepine 42 can subsequently be obtained from the 3 -unsubstituted diazepine 44 by treatment with dimethyl ether, followed by base, followed by SOCl2 (Bell et al. (1962) J. Org. Chem. 27:1691; and Bell U.S. Patent No. 3,198,789). The resulting 3-chloro moiety can be displaced from the intermediate 47, as shown in Figure 3, to form the 3-amino diazepine 48. Substitution of Nj and the 3-amino moiety to form the subject peptidomimetics can be carried out as described above.
In yet another embodiment, the subject peptidomimetic comprises an azepine core having only one heteratom (1 -azepine; Formula II, Z=carbon atom). As Figure 4 illustrates, the appropriate ortho-substituted aryl or heterocyclic ring 5.5 can be derivatized with a protected triflate 56 derived from an amino acid, followed by saponification and cyclization to form the 1 ,5-disubstituted 1 -azepine 5_8. The azepine ring, in similar fashion to the diazepine ring, can be converted to the 3 -amino substituted form 52, which is subsequently used to generate the present peptidomimetics as described above. For example, the 3-amino azepine 52 can be reacted with an N-protected phosphotyrosine (or analog thereof) and a peptide coupling reagent such as DCC or EDC, to yield the 3-amino-PTyr azepine 60. Saponification of O followed by derizatiation with an amino acid residue utilizing, for example, methionine methyl ester and isobutyl chloroformate in THF, results in the N-[l-(2- methionyl-2-oxoethyl)-l-azepin-3-yl-2-one]-phosphotyrosine 6_L The peptidomimetic £1 can be extended in either the carboxy or amino-terminal direction by standard peptide synthesis protocols. Alternatively, the C-terminal and/or N-terminal blocking groups can be removed or changed to a more suitable blocking group for the intended use or route of administration of the compound.
As described above, a number of phosphotyrosine analogs can be useful for generating the present peptidominetics. In preferred embodiment, the phosphotyrosine analog is a non-hydrolyzable analog. For example, Figures 5A-C illustrate the synthesis of a 4-boronophenylalanine which can be utilized to generate a boronic acid analog of phosphotyrosine. Briefly, ethylene glycol is added to diisopropyl dichloromethaneboronate 65 dissolved in THF, stored for 3 days at room temperature, and subsequently fractionally distilled to yield the 2-dichloromethyl-2-bora- 1,3-dioxacyclopentane 66. Tri-n-butyltin hydride is added to a solution of 66 in dry benzene. A catalytic amount of 2,2'-azobis-(2- methylpropionitrile) is introduced and the resulting solution is stirred for 24 hours at room temperature. Fractional distillation of the resulting solution yields the 2-chloromethyl-2- bora-l,3-dioxacyclopentane (∑L, which can be converted to the 2-iodomethyl compound 6j£ by addition of sodium iodide to a solution of 62 in dry acetone and refluxing for 48 hours. (Wutz et al. (1982) J. Organometal. Chem. 234:137-141).
Figure 5B illustrates another embodiment of an activated boronate for synthesizing a boronic acid analog of tyrosine. As depicted, dichloromethaneboronic acid 21 (Rathke et al. (1976) J. Organometal Chem. 122:145) is dissolved in benzene along with pinacol 6H20. The resulting biphasic mixture is then heated to reflux under an argon atmosphere, utilizing a Dean-Spark trap to remove water as a azeotrope. After 72 hours at reflux, the resulting solution is fractionally distilled to yield the 4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-2-dichloromethyl-2-bora-l,3- cyclopentane 22- Following the procedure illustrated in Figure 5 A for the preparation of the 2-chloromethyl ≤2 from the 2-dichloromethyl 66, the 2-chloromethyl 21 can be generated, and, in similar fashion as described above, can be subsequently converted to the 4,4,5,5- tetramethyl-2-iodomethyl-2-bora-l,3-cyclopentane 24 for use in synthesizing a boronate pinacol analog of phosphotyrosine.
Figure 5C illustrates a general preparation scheme for condensing boronyl esters such as 68 and 25 with a halogen-activated phenylalanine, such as 4-chlorophenylalanine 69. Following the procedures of Knochel (1990) J Amer Chem Soc 112:7431-7433, a typical reaction scheme would comprise first activating zinc dust with dibromomethane (under an argon atmosphere), followed by dropwise addition of a THF solution containing the boronyl ester while stirring at 25°C for approximately 0.5 to 2 hours. The zinc dust is then decanted and transferred to a solution made of copper cyanide, lithium chloride, and THF. The resulting copper derivatives are then reacted with the acyl halide 62 to generate the boronate 70. which can be utilized in the synthesis of the subject peptidomimetics.
The peptidomimetics of the present invention, such as libraries of variants of formula I having various representative classes of substituents, can be rapidly screened in high throughput assays in order to identify potential lead compounds for inhibiting the ability of a particular SH2 domain to bind a phosphotyrosine-containing polypeptide. For instance, the basic strategy of the "two-hybrid" assay (Fields et al. (1989) Nature 340:245-246) can be employed to rapidly screen the compounds of the present invention. In this assay system, the N-terminal domain of GAL4 (or other similar protein), which binds to specfic DNA sequences (UASQ), is used to generate a fusion protein (GAL4-DB/SH2) with at least an SH2-domain containing portion of a protein. The C-terminal domain of GAL4, which is necessary to activate transcription by GAL4, is used to create a fusion protein (GAL4- AD/target) with a phosphotyrosine-containing polypeptide target of the SH2 domain of interest. Thus, under circumstances wherein the SH2 domain is capable of binding the phosphotyrosine of the target protein, the resulting fusion protein complex will reconstitute - -
proximity of the GAL4 domains, and transcription of a gene regulated by UASQ can occur. To further illustrate, the UASG sequence can be utilized to generate a reporter gene construct, such as a luciferase gene construct, which is then used to transfect host cells. Expression of the reporter gene thus reguires the presence of the reconstituted GAL4 domains.
Initial results obtained with boronophenylalanine containing peptides, in SH2 binding studies, suggested that the boronophenylalanine derivatives were potentially capable of binding to the phosphotyrosine binding site of an SH2 domain with great affinity. Moreover, it is presently believed that boronophenylalanine-containing compounds can have broad application as kinase and phosphatase ihibitors as well. Accordingly, another aspect of the present invention provides this moiety in a wide range of compounds. In one embodiment, the boronophenylalanine is represented by the general formula (Formula V):
Figure imgf000032_0001
wherein
Y' represents a substitution at one of the meta, ortho or para positions of the phenyl moiety, Y' being a borono given by the general formula
Figure imgf000032_0002
Rj5 and R16 each independently represent hydrogen, a lower alkyl, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, or Rj5 and Rjg taken together with the O-B-O atoms to which they are attached complete a heterocyclic ring having from 5 to 8 atoms in the ring structure;
R'l4 is absent or represents one or more substituents at remaining ring positions, which substituents are selected from halogens, lower alkyls, lower alkoxys, a hydroxyl, amino, nitro, thiol, amines, imines, amides, carbonyls, carboxyls, silyls, ethers, thioethers, sulfonyls, selenoethers, ketones, aldehydes, esters, or -(CH2)m-R7, -CF3, -CN, or the like;
X8 and X9 each, independently, represent a methylene, an ethylene, an acetylene, an amine, a carbonyl, a phosphonyl, a sulfer, an oxygen, or a selenium;
R'17 is absent, or represents hydrogen, halogens, alkyls, alkenyls, alkynyls, hydroxyl, amino, nitro, thiol, amines, imines, amides, phosphoryls, phosphonates, phosphines, carbonyls, carboxyls, silyls, ethers, thioethers, sulfonyls, selenoethers, ketones, aldehydes, esters, or -(CH2)m-R7 or R'17 represents an amino acid residue or peptide condensed with X8; R'3 is absent, or represents hydrogen, halogens, alkyls, alkenyls, alkynyls, hydroxyl, amino, nitro, thiol, amines, imines, amides, phosphoryls, phosphonates, phosphines, carbonyls, carboxyls, silyls, ethers, thioethers, sulfonyls, selenoethers, ketones, aldehydes, esters, or -(CH2)m-R7 or R'3 represents an amino acid residue or peptide condensed with X9;
R7 represents an aryl, a cycloalkyl, a cycloalkenyl, a heterocycle or a polycycle; m is zero or an integer in the range of 1 to 8; and n is 1, 2-or 3.
In preferred embodiments, the compounds of formula V will have atleast one methylene between the phenyl ring and the borono moiety Y', e.g., m=l, more preferably though, m=2. Likewise, in preferred embodiments, n=l .
As above, the substitutions of formula V can chosen so as to provide a cross-linking agent for covalently or non-covalently immobilizing the mimetic on an insoluble matrix, e.g., to purify SH2 proteins, tyrosine kinases, tyrosine phosphatase, etc.. The substituents can also provide a detectable label, such as radiolabel or fluorogenic label, or biotin, streptavidin or the like, for detecting the presence of the mimetic.
In preferred embodiments, the compound of formula V is provided as a peptide or peptide analog which is equivalent in size to a dipeptide or larger, e.g., the compound is a peptide of peptide analog of 2 or greated amino acids or amino acid analogs. Preferably, length of the peptide or peptide analog is in the range of 2 to 30 amino acid residues, more preferably from 2 to 20 or 4 to 20 residues in length, and even more preferably from 4 to 10 residues in length.
As is apparent from the present disclosure, non-hydrolyzable peptide analogs can be generated which incoporate the compound of formula V. For illustrative purposes, peptide analogs of the present invention can be generated using, in addition to the benzodiazepines described above, substituted gama lactam rings (Garvey et al. in Peptides: Chemistry and Biology, G.R. Marshall ed., ESCOM Publisher: Leiden, Netherlands, 1988, pl23), C-7 mimics (Huffman et al. in Peptides: Chemistry and Biologyy, G.R. Marshall ed., ESCOM Publisher: Leiden, Netherlands, 1988, p. 105), keto-methylene pseudopeptides (Ewenson et al. (1986) J Med Chem 29:295; and Ewenson et al. in Peptides: Structure and Function (Proceedings of the 9th American Peptide Symposium) Pierce Chemical Co. Rockland, IL, 1985), β-tum dipeptide cores (Nagai et al. (1985) Tetrahedron Lett 26:647; and Sato et al. (1986) J Chem Soc Perkin Trans 1:1231), β-aminoalcohols (Gordon et al. (1985) Biochem Biophys Res Commun\26:4l9; and Dann et al. (1986) Biochem Biophys Res Commun 134:71), diaminoketones (Natarajan et al. (1984) Biochem Biophys Res Commun 124:141), and methyleneamino-modifed (Roark et al. in Peptides: Chemistry and Biology, G.R. Marshall ed., ESCOM Publisher: Leiden, Netherlands, 1988, pi 34). Also, see generally, Session III: Analytic and synthetic methods, in in Peptides: Chemistry and Biology, G.R. Marshall ed., ESCOM Publisher: Leiden, Netherlands, 1988)
In an exemplary embodiment, the peptidomimetic can be derived as a retro-inverso analog of the peptide. To illustrate, the boronoF-EEI peptide can be generated as the retro- inverso analog:
Figure imgf000034_0001
Such retro-inverso analogs can be made according to the methods known in the art, such as that described by the Sisto et al. U.S. Patent 4,522,752. For example, the illustrated retro-inverso analog can be generated as follows. The geminal diamine corresponding to the boronophenylalanine analog is synthesized by treating a borono-protected (e.g. as the 2,6- dichlorobenzyl ether) N-Boc-L-boronoPhe with ammonia under HOBT-DCC coupling conditions to yield N-Boc-L-boronophenylalanineamide, and then effecting a Hofmann-type rearrangement with I,I-bis-(trifluoroacetoxy)iodobenzene (TIB), as described in Radhakrishna et al. (1979) J. Org. Chem. Λ4:\1Λ6. The product amine salt is then coupled to a side-chain protected (e.g., as the benzyl ester) N-Fmoc D-Glu residue under standard conditions to yield the pseudodipeptide. The Fmoc (fluorenylmethoxycarbonyl) group is removed with piperidine in dimethylformamide, and the resulting amine is trimethylsilylated with bistrimethylsilylacetamide (BSA) before condensation with suitably alkylated, side¬ chain protected derivative of Meldrum's acid, as described in U.S. Patent 5,061,811 to Pinori et al., to yield the retro-inverso tripeptide analog. The pseudotripeptide is then coupled with L-Ile under standard conditions to give the protected tetrapeptide analog. The protecting groups are removed to release the final product, which is purified by HPLC.
In another illustrative embodiment, the peptidomimetic can be derived as a retro- enatio analog of the peptide, such as the exemplary retro-enatio peptide analog:
Figure imgf000035_0001
Retro-enantio analogs such as this can be synthesized using D-enatiomers of the subject borono-analogs and commercially available D-amino acids and standard solid- or solution-phase peptide-synthesis techniques. For example, in a preferred solid-phase synthesis method, a suitably amino-protected (t-butyloxycarbonyl, Boc) D- boronophenylalanine residue is covalently bound to a solid support such as chloromethyl resin. The boronyl can be protected, for example, as described in the examples below. The resin is washed with dichloromethane (DCM), and the BOC protecting group removed by treatment with TFA in DCM. The resin is washed and neutralized, and the next Boc- protected D-amino acid (D-Glu; the side -chain carboxylate is protected as, for example, the benzyl ester) is introduced by coupling with diisopropylcarbodiimide. The resin is again washed, and the cycle repeated for each of the remaining amino acids in turn (D-Glu, D-Met). When synthesis of the protected retro-enantio peptide is complete, the protecting groups are removed and the peptide cleaved from the solid support by treatment with hydrofluoric acid/anisole/dimethyl sulfide/thioanisole. The final product is purified by HPLC to yield the pure retro-enantio analog.
In still another illustrative embodiment, trans-olefin derivatives can be made with the subject boronophenylalanine analogs. For example, an exemplary olefin analog is:
Figure imgf000035_0002
The trans olefin analog of a boronophenylalanine containing peptide can be synthesized according to the method of Y.K. Shue et al. (1987) Tetrahedron Letters 28:3225, which scheme is shown in Figure 8. For the illustrated example, Boc-amino, side-chain-protected (as, for example, the 2-adamantanyl ester) L-glutamic acid derivative is converted to the corresponding α-amino aldehyde, which is treated with a vinylcuprate to yield a diastereomeric mixture of alcohols 215. which are carried on together. The allylic alcohol is acetylated with acetic anhydride in pyridine, and the olefin is cleaved with osmium tetroxide/sodium periodate to yield the aldehyde, which is condensed with the Wittig reagent derived from a protected glutarate precursor, to yield the allylic acetate. The allylic acetate 216 is selectively hydrolyzed with sodium carbonate in methanol, and the allylic alcohol is treated with triphenylphosphine and carbon tetrabromide to yield the allylic bromide 215. This compound is reduced with zinc in acetic acid to give the transposed trans olefin 218 as a mixture of diastereomers at the newly-formed center. The diastereomers are separated and the pseudodipeptide 219 is obtained by selective transfer hydrogenolysis to unveil the free carboxylic acid.
The pseudodipeptide is then coupled at the C-terminus with a suitably protected He residue, and at the N-terminus with the protected boronophneylalanine residue, by standard techniques, to yield the protected tetrapeptide isostere. The protecting groups are then removed with strong acid to yield the desired peptide analog, which can be further purified by HPLC.
Other pseudodipeptides can be made by the method set forth above merely by substitution of the appropriate starting Boc amino acid and Wittig reagent. Variations in the procedure may be necessary according to the nature of the reagents used, but any such variations will be purely routine and will be obvious to one of skill in the art.
It is further possible couple the pseudodipeptides synthesized by the above method to other pseudodipeptides, to make peptide analogs with several olefinic functionalities in place of amide functionalities. For example, pseudodipeptides corresponding to pTyr-Glu and Glu- Ile could be made and then coupled together by standard techniques to yield an analog of the tetrapeptide pYEEI which has two olefinic bonds between residues.
Still another class of peptidomimetic boronophenylalanine derivatives include the phosphonate derivatives, such as:
Figure imgf000037_0001
The synthesis of such phosphonate derivatives can be adapted from known synthesis schemes. See, for example, Loots et al. in Peptides: Chemistry and Biology, (Escom Science
Publishers, Leiden, 1988, p. 118); Petrillo et al. in Peptides: Structure and Function
(Proceedings of the 9th American Peptide Symposium, Pierce Chemical Co. Rockland, IL,
1985).
In another aspect, the present invention provides pharmaceutically acceptable compositions which comprise a therapeutically-effective amount of one or more of the compounds described above, formulated together with one or more pharmaceutically acceptable carriers (additives) and/or diluents. As described in detail below, the pharmaceutical compositions of the present invention may be specially formulated for administration in solid or liquid form, including those adapted for the following: (1) oral administration, for example, drenches (aqueous or non-aqueous solutions or suspensions), tablets, boluses, powders, granules, pastes for application to the tongue; (2) parenteral administration, for example, by subcutaneous, intramuscular or intravenous injection as, for example, a sterile solution or suspension; (3) topical application, for example, as a cream, ointment or spray applied to the skin; or (4) intravaginally or intravectally, for example, as a pessary, cream or foam.
The phrase "therapeutically-effective amount" as used herein means that amount of a compound, material, or composition comprising a peptide or peptidomimetic of the present invention which is effective for producing some desired therapeutic effect by inhibiting an intracellular signalling pathway in at least a sub-population of cells in an animal and thereby blocking the biological consequences of that pathway in the treated cells, at a reasonable benefit/risk ratio applicable to any medical treatment.
The phrase "pharmaceutically acceptable" is employed herein to refer to those compounds, materials, compositions, and/or dosage forms which are, within the scope of sound medical judgment, suitable for use in contact with the tissues of human beings and animals without excessive toxicity, irritation, allergic response, or other problem or complication, commensurate with a reasonable benefit/risk ratio.
The phrase "pharmaceutically-acceptable carrier" as used herein means a pharmaceutically-acceptable material, composition or vehicle, such as a liquid or solid filler, diluent, excipient, solvent or encapsulating material, involved in carrying or transporting the subject peptidomimetic agent from one organ, or portion of the body, to another organ, or portion of the body. Each carrier must be "acceptable" in the sense of being compatible with the other ingredients of the formulation and not injurious to the patient. Some examples of materials which can serve as pharmaceutically-acceptable carriers include: (1) sugars, such as lactose, glucose and sucrose; (2) starches, such as corn starch and potato starch; (3) cellulose, and its derivatives, such as sodium carboxymethyl cellulose, ethyl cellulose and cellulose acetate; (4) powdered tragacanth; (5) malt; (6) gelatin; (7) talc; (8) excipients, such as cocoa butter and suppository waxes; (9) oils, such as peanut oil, cottonseed oil, safflower oil, sesame oil, olive oil, corn oil and soybean oil; (10) glycols, such as propylene glycol; (11) polyols, such as glycerin, sorbitol, mannitol and polyethylene glycol; (12) esters, such as ethyl oleate and ethyl laurate; (13) agar; (14) buffering agents, such as magnesium hydroxide and aluminum hydroxide; (15) alginic acid; (16) pyrogen-free water; (17) isotonic saline; (18) Ringer's solution; (19) ethyl alcohol; (20) phosphate buffer solutions; and (21) other non¬ toxic compatible substances employed in pharmaceutical formulations.
As set out above, certain embodiments of the present SH2-inhibitors may contain a basic functional group, such as amino or alkylamino, and are, thus, capable of forming pharmaceutically-acceptable salts with pharmaceutically-acceptable acids. The term "pharmaceutically-acceptable salts" in this respect, refers to the relatively non-toxic, inorganic and organic acid addition salts of peptides or peptidomimetics of the present invention. These salts can be prepared in situ during the final isolation and purification of the peptidomimetics of the invention, or by separately reacting a purified peptidomimetic of the invention in its free base form with a suitable organic or inorganic acid, and isolating the salt thus formed. Representative salts include the hydrobromide, hydrochloride, sulfate, bisulfate, phosphate, nitrate, acetate, valerate, oleate, palmitate, stearate, laurate, benzoate, lactate, phosphate, tosylate, citrate, maleate, fumarate, succinate, tartrate, napthylate, mesylate, glucoheptonate, lactobionate, and laurylsulphonate salts and the like. (See, for example, Berge et al. (1977) "Pharmaceutical Salts", J. Pharm. Sci. 66:1-19)
In other cases, the compounds of the present invention may contain one or more acidic functional groups and, thus, are capable of forming pharmaceutically-acceptable salts with pharmaceutically-acceptable bases. The term "pharmaceutically-acceptable salts" in these instances refers to the relatively non-toxic, inorganic and organic base addition salts of peptides and peptidomimetics of the present invention. These salts can likewise be prepared in situ during the final isolation and purification of the peptides or peptidomimetics, or by separately reacting the purified compound in its free acid form with a suitable base, such as the hydroxide, carbonate or bicarbonate of a pharmaceutically-acceptable metal cation, with ammonia, or with a pharmaceutically-acceptable organic primary, secondary or tertiary amine. Representative alkali or alkaline earth salts include the lithium, sodium, potassium, calcium, magnesium, and aluminum salts and the like. Representative organic amines useful for the formation of base addition salts include ethylamine, diethylamine, ethylenediamine, ethanolamine, diethanolamine, piperazine and the like. (See, for example, Berge et al., supra)
Wetting agents, emulsifiers and lubricants, such as sodium lauryl sulfate and magnesium stearate, as well as coloring agents, release agents, coating agents, sweetening, flavoring and perfuming agents, preservatives and antioxidants can also be present in the compositions.
Examples of pharmaceutically-acceptable antioxidants include: (1) water soluble antioxidants, such as ascorbic acid, cysteine hydrochloride, sodium bisulfate, sodium metabisulfite, sodium sulfite and the like; (2) oil-soluble antioxidants, such as ascorbyl palmitate, butylated hydroxyanisole (BHA), butylated hydroxytoluene (BHT), lecithin, propyl gallate, alpha-tocopherol, and the like; and (3) metal chelating agents, such as citric acid, ethylenediamine tetraacetic acid (EDTA), sorbitol, tartaric acid, phosphoric acid, and the like.
Formulations of the present invention include those suitable for oral, nasal, topical (including buccal and sublingual), rectal, vaginal and/or parenteral administration. The formulations may conveniently be presented in unit dosage form and may be prepared by any methods well known in the art of pharmacy. The amount of active ingredient which can be combined with a carrier material to produce a single dosage form will vary depending upon the host being treated, the particular mode of administration. The amount of active ingredient which can be combined with a carrier material to produce a single dosage form will generally be that amount of the peptide or peptidomimetic which produces a therapeutic effect. Generally, out of one hundred per cent, this amount will range from about 1 per cent to about ninety-nine percent of active ingredient, preferably from about 5 per cent to about 70 per cent, most preferably from about 10 per cent to about 30 per cent.
Methods of preparing these formulations or compositions include the step of bringing into association a compound of the present invention with the carrier and, optionally, one or more accessory ingredients. In general, the formulations are prepared by uniformly and intimately bringing into association a peptide or peptidomimetic of the present invention with liquid carriers, or finely divided solid carriers, or both, and then, if necessary, shaping the product.
Formulations of the invention suitable for oral administration may be in the form of capsules, cachets, pills, tablets, lozenges (using a flavored basis, usually sucrose and acacia or tragacanth), powders, granules, or as a solution or a suspension in an aqueous or non-aqueous liquid, or as an oil-in-water or water-in-oil liquid emulsion, or as an elixir or syrup, or as pastilles (using an inert base, such as gelatin and glycerin, or sucrose and acacia) and/or as mouth washes and the like, each containing a predetermined amount of a compound of the present invention as an active ingredient. A peptide or peptidomimetic of the present invention may also be administered as a bolus, electuary or paste.
In solid dosage forms of the invention for oral administration (capsules, tablets, pills, dragees, powders, granules and the like), the active ingredient is mixed with one or more pharmaceutically-acceptable carriers, such as sodium citrate or dicalcium phosphate, and/or any of the following: (1) fillers or extenders, such as starches, lactose, sucrose, glucose, mannitol, and or silicic acid; (2) binders, such as, for example, carboxymethylcellulose, alginates, gelatin, polyvinyl pyrrolidone, sucrose and/or acacia; (3) humectants, such as glycerol; (4) disintegrating agents, such as agar-agar, calcium carbonate, potato or tapioca starch, alginic acid, certain silicates, and sodium carbonate; (5) solution retarding agents, such as paraffin; (6) absorption accelerators, such as quaternary ammonium compounds; (7) wetting agents, such as, for example, cetyl alcohol and glycerol monostearate; (8) absorbents, such as kaolin and bentonite clay; (9) lubricants, such a talc, calcium stearate, magnesium stearate, solid polyethylene glycols, sodium lauryl sulfate, and mixtures thereof; and (10) coloring agents. In the case of capsules, tablets and pills, the pharmaceutical compositions may also comprise buffering agents. Solid compositions of a similar type may also be employed as fillers in soft and hard-filled gelatin capsules using such excipients as lactose or milk sugars, as well as high molecular weight polyethylene glycols and the like.
A tablet may be made by compression or molding, optionally with one or more accessory ingredients. Compressed tablets may be prepared using binder (for example, gelatin or hydroxypropylmethyl cellulose), lubricant, inert diluent, preservative, disintegrant (for example, sodium starch glycolate or cross-linked sodium carboxymethyl cellulose), surface- active or dispersing agent. Molded tablets may be made by molding in a suitable machine a mixture of the powdered peptide or peptidomimetic moistened with an inert liquid diluent. The tablets, and other solid dosage forms of the pharmaceutical compositions of the present invention, such as dragees, capsules, pills and granules, may optionally be scored or prepared with coatings and shells, such as enteric coatings and other coatings well known in the pharmaceutical-formulating art. They may also be formulated so as to provide slow or controlled release of the active ingredient therein using, for example, hydroxypropylmethyl cellulose in varying proportions to provide the desired release profile, other polymer matrices, liposomes and/or microspheres. They may be sterilized by, for example, filtration through a bacteria-retaining filter, or by incorporating sterilizing agents in the form of sterile solid compositions which can be dissolved in sterile water, or some other sterile injectable medium immediately before use. These compositions may also optionally contain opacifying agents and may be of a composition that they release the active ingredient(s) only, or preferentially, in a certain portion of the gastrointestinal tract, optionally, in a delayed manner. Examples of embedding compositions which can be used include polymeric substances and waxes. The active ingredient can also be in micro-encapsulated form, if appropriate, with one or more of the above-described excipients.
Liquid dosage forms for oral administration of the compounds of the invention include pharmaceutically acceptable emulsions, microemulsions, solutions, suspensions, syrups and elixirs. In addition to the active ingredient, the liquid dosage forms may contain inert diluents commonly used in the art, such as, for example, water or other solvents, solubilizing agents and emulsifiers, such as ethyl alcohol, isopropyl alcohol, ethyl carbonate, ethyl acetate, benzyl alcohol, benzyl benzoate, propylene glycol, 1,3-butylene glycol, oils (in particular, cottonseed, groundnut, corn, germ, olive, castor and sesame oils), glycerol, tetrahydrofuryl alcohol, polyethylene glycols and fatty acid esters of sorbitan, and mixtures thereof.
Besides inert diluents, the oral compositions can also include adjuvants such as wetting agents, emulsifying and suspending agents, sweetening, flavoring, coloring, perfuming and preservative agents.
Suspensions, in addition to the active peptides or peptidomimetics, may contain suspending agents as, for example, ethoxylated isostearyl alcohols, polyoxyethylene sorbitol and sorbitan esters, microcrystalline cellulose, aluminum metahydroxide, bentonite, agar-agar and tragacanth, and mixtures thereof.
Formulations of the pharmaceutical compositions of the invention for rectal or vaginal administration may be presented as a suppository, which may be prepared by mixing one or more compounds of the invention with one or more suitable nonirritating excipients or carriers comprising, for example, cocoa butter, polyethylene glycol, a suppository wax or a salicylate, and which is solid at room temperature, but liquid at body temperature and, therefore, will melt in the rectum or vaginal cavity and release the active peptidomimetic.
Formulations of the present invention which are suitable for vaginal administration also include pessaries, tampons, creams, gels, pastes, foams or spray formulations containing such carriers as are known in the art to be appropriate.
Dosage forms for the topical or transdermal administration of a peptide or peptidomimetic of this invention include powders, sprays, ointments, pastes, creams, lotions, gels, solutions, patches and inhalants. The active compound may be mixed under sterile conditions with a pharmaceutically-acceptable carrier, and with any preservatives, buffers, or propellants which may be required.
The ointments, pastes, creams and gels may contain, in addition to an active peptide or peptidomimetic of this invention, excipients, such as animal and vegetable fats, oils, waxes, paraffins, starch, tragacanth, cellulose derivatives, polyethylene glycols, silicones, bentonites, silicic acid, talc and zinc oxide, or mixtures thereof.
Powders and sprays can contain, in addition to a compound of this invention, excipients such as lactose, talc, silicic acid, aluminum hydroxide, calcium silicates and polyamide powder, or mixtures of these substances. Sprays can additionally contain customary propellants, such as chlorofluorohydrocarbons and volatile unsubstituted hydrocarbons, such as butane and propane.
Transdermal patches have the added advantage of providing controlled delivery of a compound of the present invention to the body. Such dosage forms can be made by dissolving or dispersing the peptidomimetic in the proper medium. Absorption enhancers can also be used to increase the flux of the peptidomimetic across the skin. The rate of such flux can be controlled by either providing a rate controlling membrane or dispersing the peptidomimetic in a polymer matrix or gel.
Opthalmic formulations, eye ointments, powders, solutions and the like, are also contemplated as being within the scope of this invention.
Pharmaceutical compositions of this invention suitable for parenteral administration comprise one or more peptides or peptidomimetics of the invention in combination with one or more pharmaceutically-acceptable sterile isotonic aqueous or nonaqueous solutions, dispersions, suspensions or emulsions, or sterile powders which may be reconstituted into sterile injectable solutions or dispersions just prior to use, which may contain antioxidants, buffers, bacteriostats, solutes which render the formulation isotonic with the blood of the intended recipient or suspending or thickening agents.
Examples of suitable aqueous and nonaqueous carriers which may be employed in the pharmaceutical - compositions of the invention include water, ethanol, polyols (such as glycerol, propylene glycol, polyethylene glycol, and the like), and suitable mixtures thereof, vegetable oils, such as olive oil, and injectable organic esters, such as ethyl oleate. Proper fluidity can be maintained, for example, by the use of coating materials, such as lecithin, by the maintenance of the required particle size in the case of dispersions, and by the use of surfactants.
These compositions may also contain adjuvants such as preservatives, wetting agents, emulsifying agents and dispersing agents. Prevention of the action of microorganisms may be ensured by the inclusion of various antibacterial and antifungal agents, for example, paraben, chlorobutanol, phenol sorbic acid, and the like. It may also be desirable to include isotonic agents, such as sugars, sodium chloride, and the like into the compositions. In addition, prolonged absorption of the injectable pharmaceutical form may be brought about by the inclusion of agents which delay absorption such as aluminum monostearate and gelatin.
In some cases, in order to prolong the effect of a drug, it is desirable to slow the absorption of the drug from subcutaneous or intramuscular injection. This may be accomplished by the use of a liquid suspension of crystalline or amorphous material having poor water solubility. The rate of absorption of the drug then depends upon its rate of dissolution which, in turn, may depend upon crystal size and crystalline form. Alternatively, delayed absorption of a parenterally-administered drug form is accomplished by dissolving or suspending the drug in an oil vehicle.
Injectable depot forms are made by forming microencapsule matrices of the subject peptides or peptidomimetics in biodegradable polymers such as polylactide-polyglycolide. Depending on the ratio of drug to polymer, and the nature of the particular polymer employed, the rate of drug release can be controlled. Examples of other biodegradable polymers include poly(orthoesters) and poly(anhydrides). Depot injectable formulations are also prepared by entrapping the drug in liposomes or microemulsions which are compatible with body tissue. When the compounds of the present invention are administered as pharmaceuticals, to humans and animals, they can be given per se or as a pharmaceutical composition containing, for example, 0.1 to 99.5% (more preferably, 0.5 to 90%) of active ingredient in combination with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
The preparations of the present invention may be given orally, parenterally, topically, or rectally. They are of course given by forms suitable for each administration route. For example, they are administered in tablets or capsule form, by injection, inhalation, eye lotion, ointment, suppository, etc. administration by injection, infusion or inhilation; topical by lotion or ointment; and rectal by suppositories. Oral administration is preferred.
The phrases "parenteral administration" and "administered parenterally" as used herein means modes of administration other than enteral and topical administration, usually by injection, and includes, without limitation, intravenous, intramuscular, intraarterial, intrathecal, intracapsular, intraorbital, intracardiac, intradermal, intraperitoneal, transtracheal, subcutaneous, subcuticular, intraarticulare, subcapsular, subarachnoid, intraspinal and intrasternal injection and infusion.
The phrases "systemic administration," "administered systemically," "peripheral administration" and "administered peripherally" as used herein mean the administration of a compound, drug or other material other than directly into the central nervous system, such that it enters the patient's system and, thus, is subject to metabolism and other like processes, for example, subcutaneous administration.
These peptides and peptidomimetics may be administered to humans and other animals for therapy by any suitable route of administration, including orally, nasally, as by, for example, a spray, rectally, intravaginally, parenterally, intracisternally and topically, as by powders, ointments or drops, including buccally and sublingually.
Regardless of the route of administration selected, the compounds of the present invention, which may be used in a suitable hydrated form, and/or the pharmaceutical compositions of the present invention, are formulated into pharmaceutically-acceptable dosage forms by conventional methods known to those of skill in the art.
Actual dosage levels of the active ingredients in the pharmaceutical compositions of this invention may be varied so as to obtain an amount of the active ingredient which is effective to achieve the desired therapeutic response for a particular patient, composition, and mode of administration, without being toxic to the patient. The selected dosage level will depend upon a variety of factors including the activity of the particular peptide or peptidomimetic of the present invention employed, or the ester, salt or amide thereof, the route of administration, the time of administration, the rate of excretion of the particular compound being employed, the duration of the treatment, other drugs, compounds and/or materials used in combination with the particular peptidomimetic employed, the age, sex, weight, condition, general health and prior medical history of the patient being treated, and like factors well known in the medical arts.
A physician or veterinarian having ordinary skill in the art can readily determine and prescribe the effective amount of the pharmaceutical composition required. For example, the physician or veterinarian could start doses of the compounds of the invention employed in the pharmaceutical composition at levels lower than that required in order to achieve the desired therapeutic effect and gradually increase the dosage until the desired effect is achieved.
In general, a suitable daily dose of a peptide or peptidomimetic of the invention will be that amount of the compound which is the lowest dose effective to produce a therapeutic effect. Such an effective dose will generally depend upon the factors described above. Generally, intravenous, intracerebroventricular and subcutaneous doses of the compounds of this invention for a patient, when used for the indicated analgesic effects, will range from about 0.0001 to about 100 mg per kilogram of body weight per day.
If desired, the effective daily dose of the active peptide or peptidomimetic may be administered as two, three, four, five, six or more sub-doses administered separately at appropriate intervals throughout the day, optionally, in unit dosage forms.
While it is possible for a compound of the present invention to be administered alone, it is preferable to administer the peptidomimetic as a pharmaceutical formulation (composition).
Ill Exemplary Uses
It is yet another aspect of the present invention to utilize the subject peptide or peptidomimetics to modulate intracellular signaling pathways by disrupting particular protein-protein interactions mediated by SH2 domains. For instance, the subject compounds can be contacted with a cell, either in vivo (e.g. adminstered to a patient or animal) or in vitro (e.g. employed in cell culture), to affect the responsiveness of a cell to a growth factor, cytokine or other receptor ligand; as an immunosuppressant; to prevent osteoclastic resorption of bone during osteoporosis; influence differentiation of cells; to modulate cellular response to interactions with the extracellular matrix, as well as affect the production and secretion of extracellular matrix components; prevent viral infection and/or viral-mediated transformation of cells; and to inhibit the proliferation of transformed cells or to render transformed cells more sensitive to cytostatic or cytotoxic agents. The SH2 target of the subject inhibitors can range from the interaction between, for example, an activated receptor complex and the initial cytoplasmic proteins involved in triggering a particular set of intracellular signaling pathways, to the last SH2-mediated interaction in a specific pathway, such as the formation of a transcription factor complex or allosteric regulation of an enzymatic activity. Thus, the inhibitors of the present invention can be used to prevent the interaction between a phosphotyrosine residue and such SH2-containing signal transduction proteins as, for example, Src, Lck, Fps, phosphatidylinositol-3-kinases, ras GTPase- activating protein, Fyn, Lyk, Fgr, Fes, ZAP-70, Abl, Crk, Nek, Sem-5, p85, phospholipase C, SHPTP1, SHPTP2, corkscrew, Syk, Lyn, Yes, Hck, Dsrc, Tec, Atk/Bpk, Itk/Tsk, Arg, Csk, tensin, Vav, She, Emt, Grb2, Syp, Blk, Bpk 113TF, 91TF, and Janus kinases including Tyk2, JAK1 and JAK2. It is understood in the art that the above designations may in some instances refer to a family of related proteins which may include tissue-type specific expression, arising from, for example, differential splicing. Moreover, in light of the present invention, one skilled in the art will be able to easily ascertain other SH2 proteins whose phosphotyrosine binding abilities can be inhibited with the subject compounds.
Binding of growth factors, differentiation factors, cytokines and other receptor ligands to cell surface receptors, as well as interaction of the cell with extracellular matrix components, and even fluxuation of intracellular ion concentrations (particularly calcium), are frequently causative agents in the induction of signal transduction pathways which activate protein tyrosine kinases and result in modulation of gene expression and cell morphology. For instance, a number of mechanistically distinct signal pathways, mediated by tyrosine phosphorylation states and linking cell surface receptors to transcriptional factors and other enzymes, are understood to exist.
In one aspect of the invention, the subject compound inhibits the signal transducing ability of an SH2 protein having an enzymatic activity. Exemplary enzymes include cytoplasmic tyrosine kinases (eg. src, abl, lck, nek), phosphotyrosine phosphatases, phospholipase Cγ (PLCγ), ras GTPase activating proteins (røsGAPs), and nucleotide echange factors (Koch et al. (1991) Science 252:668-674). Thus, preventing SH2-mediated interactions with the compounds of the present invention can inhibit the compartilization or localization of an SH2-containing enzyme by disrupting a phosphotyrosine-SH2 mediated interaction which would otherwise act to sequester the enzyme at a particular cellular location, such as at the cytoplasmic face of the cell membrane. Alternatively, the subjet inhibitors can be used to modulate the regulation of SH2-containing enzymes by inhibiting the formation of specific multi-protein complexes, or other forms of allosteric control. Illustrative of therapeutic targets of this class of SH2 protein include a number of inducers of signal transduction pathways, such as growth factors like EGF, PDGF, nerve growth factor (NGF) or insulin, are generally understood to activate one or more tyrosine kinase cascades, which include members of the src-family of protein tyrosine kinases, that eventually lead to activation of transcriptional factors localized in the nucleus. Likewise, several tyrosine kinases of the src-family are coupled to cell surface receptors in lymphocytes and function as signal transducers after specific ligand binding. Examples are the associations of CD4 and CD8 with lck (Veillette et al. (1988) Cell 55:301-308), interleukin-2 receptor β chain with lck (Hatakeyama et al. (1991) Science 252:1523-1528), T cell receptor complex with fyn (Samelson et al. (1990) PNAS 87:4358-4362), and the immunoglobulin receptor complex with lck, lyn, fyn, and blk (Yamanashi et al. (1991) Cell Regul. 2:479-987; and Burkhardt et al. (1991) PNAS 88:7410-7414). These interactions implicate src-related kinases in the regulation of a variety of intracellular events, from lymphokine production and cytotoxicity, to the expression of specific nuclear binding proteins. Such receptor-src interactions represent a first step in a cascade of intracellular events. For instance, a proximal and critical biochemical event upon T cell antigen receptor (TCR) stimulation is the activation of a protein tyrosine kinase pathway. ZAP-70, a PTK of the p72syk family, associates with phosphorylated TCR subunits through its SH2 domains, and has a remarkably restricted repertoire of protein binding (Wange et al. (1993) J Biol Chem 268:19797-19801). Alternatively, some cytoplasmic tyrosine kinases may serve essential regulatory functions. For example, csk is beleived to modify the activity of other tyrosine kinases (i.e. src subfamily) and down regulate the signal transduction pathways in which they participate (Nada et al. (1991) Nature 351 :69-72; Okada et al. (1991) J Biol Chem 266:24249-24252).
Recently, it has become apparent that small changes in the peptide-major histocompatibility complex (MHC) molecule ligands recognized by antigen-specific T cell receptors (TCRs) can convert fully activating complexes into partially activating or even inhibitory ones (see, for example, Madrenas et al. (1995) Science 267:515-518). In constrast to typical agonist ligands, both antagonist and several partial agonists stimulated a distinct pattern of zeta-chain phosphorylation but failed to activate associated ZAP-70 kinase. Accordingly, given the apparent role of ZAP-70 as a specific early step in the signal cascade for T-cell activation, contacting a T-cell with one of the subject peptides or peptidomimetics result in inhibition of T-cell activation and may used to induce immunosuppression by clonal anergy. Furthermore, contacting the cells simultaneously, or in close temporal proximity, with antigen and a compound of the present invention may result in immunosuppresion due to clonal deletion. In either embodiment, the subject compounds can be employed in the treatment of, for example, autoimmune disorders, to prevent graft rejection, and in the production of anergic preparations for treating allergies, e.g. for delivery with danders, pollens, etc.
Other signal transduction pathways involve the regulation of non-PTK enzymes by controlling subunit compositions or through other forms of allosteric control, and represent potential targets for inhibition by the subject compounds. Such allosteric regulation of the oncoprotein ras, which forms part of a signal cascade that links tyrosine kinase-associated receptors to nuclear events involved in mitogenesis, represent an inhibitory target for the subject compounds. Ras proteins and their relatives play critical roles in the control of normal and transformed cell growth, regulating many aspects of growth and differentiation, control of the cytoskeleton and traffic between various membrane-bound compartments in the cell. For instance, interleukin-3, erythropoietin, and steel factor all induce the tyrosine phosphorylation of the SH2-containing protein, p52shc. The formation of a complex between p52shc and the adaptor protein, Grb2, is an apparent direct link of tyrosine phoshphorylayion events to the activation of ras in hemopoietic progenitors and believed to be a critical step in stimulating these cells to transit through Gl to S phase and enter into mitosis (Cutler et al. (1993) J. Biol Chem 268:21463-21465).
Still other signaling pathways involve activation of cytoplasmic transcriptional factors by tyrosine phosphorylation, which can be disrupted at several different levels through the use of the present compounds. For example, in a "direct effector" system, transcriptional factors with SH2 domains bind directly to ligand-activated, receptor-associated tyrosine kinase(s). This association of the kinase and transcriptional factors in turn results in tyrosine phosphorylation and activation of the transcriptional factor, triggering its localization to the nucleus and mediating formation of an active transcriptional complex with other nuclear DNA-binding proteins. To illustrate, it has been shown that subunits of the interferon-α induced transcription factor complex ISGF3 (namely, the transcriptional factor subunits 113TF, 91TF, and 84TF) contain SH2 domains and are directly activated by tyrosine phosphorylation in the cytoplasm. These activated subunits translocate to the nucleus to form an active transcriptional complex with p48. A variety of other growth factors and cytokines, including interferon-γ, EGF, PDGF, CSF-1, IL-3, IL-5, IL-10, CNTF, LIF and GM-CSF, employ a pathway similar to that of interferon-α, in that are capalble of activating transcriptional factors having SH2 domains (Fu et al. (1992) Cell 70:323; Montminey (1993) Science 261 :1694; Larnet et al. (1993) Science 261 :1730; Ruff- Jamison et al. (1993) Science 261:1733; Silvennoinen et al. (1993) Science 261:1736; Sadowski et al. (1993) Science 261 :1739; and Shuai et al. (1993) Science 261 :1744). Disruption of transcriptional regulation mediated by such factors can be accomplished with the subject peptides or peptidomimetics by inhibiting the interaction of the transcription factor with an upstream activating kinase, or by inhibiting the interaction of the phosphorylated transcription factor with other SH2- containing transcription factors to form active complexes.
As indicated above, frequent among the components of each of these signal transduction pathways are proteins that contain one or more SH2 domains. For example, interactions between phosphotyrosine residues on autophosphorylated receptors and SH2 domains of signal-transducing proteins are critical for the formation of signal transduction complexes, and represent the initial transduction signals which stimulate a cascade of additional molecular interactions involved in disseminating the signal throughout the cell by complex, branching pathways that coordinate multifunctional cellular programs and control cell behavior. Each of the receptor binding proteins control at least one cellular pathway involved in the biological response to the growth factor. By targeting particular SH2- mediated interactions with the subject compounds, selective intracellular signaling pathway targets can be inhibited so as to grossly alter the cell's response parameters to the external stimulus at one extreme, or, at the other, to result only in modification of particular portion(s) of the cell's physiological response to the stimulus.
In an illustrative embodiment, the subject compounds are utilized to modulate the response of a cell to a growth factor or cytokine. It is generally understood that the binding of growth factors to their membrane receptors activates a cascade of intracellular signaling pathways that regulate phospholipid metabolism, arachidonate metabolism, protein phosphorylation, calcium mobilization and transport, and transcriptional regulation. These signaling events can result in a diversity of changes in transport properties, acute metabolic activities, membrane trafficking, cytoskeletal interactions, and the programming of gene induction governing cell growth, differentiation, and migration. Abberations in these growth factor-induced events are, for example, associated with a variety of hyperproliferative disorders such as leukemia, cancer, psoriasis, atherosclerosis, and restinosis.
A variety of polypeptide growth factor receptors have been characterized, some which possess intrinsic protein tyrosine kinase activity such as the receptors for epidermal growth factor (EGF), platelet-derived growth factor (PDGF), insulin, and certain protooncogene products including c-kit (the stem cell factor receptor) and c-fms (the macrophage colony- stimulating factor receptor); others of which have no intrinsic kinase acitivity but which sequester tyrosine kinases from the cytosol upon ligand binding, such as the receptors for interlεukin-6, ciliary neurotrophic factor (CNTF), and Oncostatin-M. Each of these classes of receptor contain distinct binding sites that serve to recruit multiple signaling molecules through protein-protein interactions, and can activate both overlapping and distinct sets of genes and effectuate a wide range of biological responses in target cells.
In an exemplary embodiment, the subject compounds can be used to inhibit proliferation of transformed cells that are stimulated by autocrine feedback loops. For example, a variety of human tumors frequently express high levels of both EGF receptors and one of its ligands, transforming growth factor alpha (TGFα). The synthesis and release of TGFα by a cell also able to be stimulated by this ligand is widely believed to create stimulatory autocrine loops (Baselga et al. (1993) J Natl Cancer Inst 85:1327-1333; and Fan et al. (1993) Cancer Res 53:4322-4328). Moreover, it has become apparent that 20 to 30 percent of cancer disease is characterized by transformed cells expressing oncogenic products which are growth factor receptors or their mutated homologs, and which exhibit protein tyrosine kinase activity. That is, they are capable of constitutive activation of signal transduction processes which drive the cell's proliferation. Inhibition of one or more intracellular signaling pathways by the present compounds can inhibit proliferation of tumor cells, and may be used alone or for potentiating the efficacy of other chemotherapeutic agents. To illustrate, the cell can be contacted with one or more compounds of the present invention suitable for inhibiting the interaction of the activated EGF receptor with such SH2- containing proteins as phospholipase C-γ, Grb2, syp, the p85 subunit of phosphotidylinositol- 3 -kinase, abl, nek, the transcription factor p91, or a combination thereof, so as to prevent signal transduction events which are involved in mitogenesis and cell proliferation. In another embodiment, the subject compounds can be utilized to inhibit SH2 -mediated interactions oth the chimeric oncoprotein BCR-ABL (with, for example, grb2), which has been implicated in the pathogenesis of Philadelphia chromosome-positive human leukemias.
The subject peptides and peptidomimetics can also be used to modify only a portion of the bioliogical response of a cell to a particular growth factor. For instance, sensitivity of a particular cell to a growth factor, or other mitogenic stimulus, which utilizes a ras signalling pathway can be either up-regulated or down-regulated by disruption of the SH2-mediated interactions of the ras protein and effector proteins which allosterically control the GTPase activity. As noted above, many tyrosine kinases, including the receptors for hormones, such as EGF, NGF and insulin, transmit intracellular signals through Ras proteins. Ligand binding to such receptors stimulates ras guaninine-nucleotide exchange activity and increases the level of GTP-bound ras, suggesting that these tyrosine kinases may activate guanine- nucleotide exchange factors (rasGEFs). Grb2, which binds the autophosphorylated EGF receptor through its SH2 domain, links the EGF receptor to a ra-sGEF. Thus, the effect of inhibiting the ability of a rasGEF to interact with, and activate a ras-type protein can be used to desensitize a cell to a particular stimulus. Conversely, targeting the subject inhibitors to the interaction between a ras protein and an inactivating subunit, such as a GTPase-activating protein (rasGAP), can be used to increase the sensitivity of the cell to a stimulus by prolonging the half-life of activated ras proteins (e.g. GTP-bound forms). In similar fashion, the present peptide analogs can be used to exploit the often antagositic relationships between a kinase and a phosphatase in signal transduction, by regulating the activity and/or localization of one of two. In one embodiment, the subject inhibitors can be used to increase the sensitivity of a cell to a cytokine or growth factor which is pyrogenic in an animal (e.g. CNTF, IL-6 or LIF). Thus, lower doses of the factor can be used and unwanted side effects can be minimized.
In yet another embodiment, the subject peptides and peptidomimetics can be used to modulate an immune response, such as to cause general or specific immunosuppression. For instance, the compounds of the present invention can be used to prevent antigen-specific or mitogen-induced differentiation and prolieration of B lymphocytes. As noted above, engagement of the B-cell antigen receptor complex induces immediate activation of receptor- associated Src family tyrosine kinases including p55blk, p59fyn, p53/561yn, and perhaps p561ck. These kinases act directly or indirectly to phosphorylate and/or activate effector proteins including the microtubule-associated protein kinase (MAPK), phospholipase C-γl (PLC-γl) and C-γ2 (PLC-γ2), ρhosphatidylinositol-3-kinase (PI-3-K), and p21ras-GTPase- activating protein (GAP). Receptor ligation triggers the activation of multiple receptor- associated src-fmaily kinases leading to phosphorylation and activation of PLC-γl and PLC- γ2. Subsequent phosphoinositide hydrolysis and calcium mobilization, presumably acting in concert with other tyrosine kinase-activated mechansims, leads to transcriptional activation of a number of immediate early genes and, ultimately, to B cell proliferation. Targetting such signal transduction pathways can result in inhibition of B-cell activation.
Likewise, another aspect of the present invention comprises the inhibition of T cell activation. Signal transduction through the T-cell receptor and cytokine receptors on the surface of T lymphocytes occurs largely via tyrosine phosphorylation of intracellular substrates. Several members of the src and syk families of tyrosine kinases have been implicated in signal transduction in lymphocytes, as well as other unique tyrosine kinases, such as emt, that are expressed mainly in T lymphocyte. Inhibition of certain signal pathways mediated by SH2 proteins can therefore be used to suppress activation of T cells.
It is also worth noting that emt appears related to the B-cell progenitor kinase (bpk), which has been implicated in X-linked hypogammaglobulinemia, to the tecl mammalian kinase, which has been implicated in liver neoplasia, and to the more widely expressed tecll mammalian kinase (Gibson et al. (1993) Blood 82:1561-1572), each of which represent potential therapeutic targets for compounds of the present invention.
While the above mechanism of inhibition resembles the induction of clonal anergy, it is also possible to utilize the subject compound to induce clonal deletion. It is generally understood that proliferation of T lymphocytes is triggered by the interaction of IL-2 with its specific receptor following T lymphocyte activation. Activation of T cells is also associated with an upregulation of IL-2 receptors (IL-2R) on the induced cells. The receptor for IL-2 consists of at least three distinct subunits, the beta chain of which is understood to be critical for receptor-mediated signalling through physical association with, and activation of, a src- family protein kinase (p561ck). It is now evident that IL-2R beta is linked to at least two intracellular signalling pathways that mediate nuclear proto-oncogene induction. One pathway is linked to the induction of the c-fos, c-jun, and other genes of this family. Another pathway leads to c-myc gene induction. By specifically inhibiting the pathway leading to fos andjun expression, but not inhibiting IL-2 induction of my c, the subject compounds can be used to cause apoptosis of activated T cells, thereby deleting those clones activated in response to a particular antigenic stimulus. Such protocols can be used, for example, in conjunction with organ and tissue transplantation, to prevent, for example, rejection of the graft by the host, or graft-versus-host disease mediated by T lymphocytes of the graft. The same strategy can also be carried out to induce clonal deletion of B-lymphocytes.
This being the case, the present compounds may also be used to modulate expression of the early-intermediate genes (cIE), such as fos, jun, and myc, in other tissue in order to prevent apoptosis. For example, the compounds of the present invention can be used to prevent apoptotic events in neurodegenerative disorders associated with activation of cIE genes by, for example, calcium-induced intracellular signalling or excititory amino acids.
In yet another embodiment of the present invention, the subject compounds can be used to inhibit certain bioligical actions of such mitogens as vascular endothelial growth factor (VEGF). For instance, the subject peptides and peptidomimetics can be employed to inhibit the abnormal proliferation of smooth muscle which takes place in atherosclerosis and which is induced by VEGF. Likewise, another aspect of the present invention comprises inhibiting the angiogenic acitivity of VEGF in order to prevent vascularization of hyperproliferative tissue, particularly in th treatment of endometriosis.
In another embodiment, the subject inhibitors can be used to affect the differentiation of a cell or tissue. For instance, EGF plays an important physiological role in the control of adipocyte differentiation, as a potent inhibitor of adipose differetiation and inhibitor of adipose tissue development. (Serrano et al. (1993) Am J Physiol 264:E800-803). Thus, depending on whether the effects of EGF are enhanced or diminished by the choice of SH2 inhibitor, the present compounds can be used in livestock to repartition nutrients between subcutaneous fat and other carcass components, including muscle, skin, bone and certain organs.
In still a further embodiment of the present invention, the subject compounds can be used to control the response of cells to extracellular matric interactions. For example, the present compounds can be employed to modulate the biological consequence of integrin- mediated cell adhesion to extracellular matrix components. It is generally understood that occupation of integrins can result in the transduction of intracellular signals, leading to cytoskeletal reorganization and induction of gene expression. Such physiological events are believed to mediated, at least in part, by potential targets for the subject compounds, such as the observed accumulation of p21ra-s in the active GTP bound state (Kepron et al. (1993) J Biol Chem 268:20701-20704) or phosphotyrosine accumulation. Indeed, the treatment of cells with the tyrosine kinase inhibitor herbimycin A diminishes the adhesion-induced tyrosine phosphorylation of intracellular proteins, and inhibits the formation of focal adhesion and stress fibers (Burridge et al. (1992) J Cell Biol 119:893-903).
In one aspect, the subject inhibitors are useful for disrupting the signal transduction pathway(s) originating from the leukocyte response intregrin (LRI), which mediate adhesion, chemotaxis, and activation of increased phagocytic potential by neutrophils (PMN) and monocytes (Carreno et al. (1993) Clin Immunol Immunopathol 69:43-51).
Another aspect of the present invention comprises inducing chondrogenesis by affecting the integrin-mediated differentiation of chondrocytes which ordinarily inhibits cartilage synthesis. The modulation of the chondrocyte phenotype, between mature fibro- chonrocytes and cartilage-producing chondroblasts, is related to integrin-mediated intracellular signalling (Loeser et al. (1993) Arthritis Rheum 36:1103-1110). Thus, the present invention contemplates the use of the subject compounds in the field of cartilage transplantation and prosthetic device therapies. To date, the growth of new cartilage from either transplantation of autologous or allogenic cartilage has been largely unsuccessful. Problems arise, for instance, because the characteristics of cartilage and fibrocartilage varies between different tissue: such as between articular, meniscal cartilage, ligaments, and tendons, between the two ends of the same ligament or tendon, and between the superficial and deep parts of the tissue. The zonal arrangement of these tissues may reflect a gradual change in mechanical properties, and failure occurs when implanted tissue, which has not differentiated under those conditions, lacks the ability to appropriately respond. For instance, when meniscal cartilage is used to repair anterior cruciate ligaments, the tissue undergoes a metaplasia to pure fibrous tissue. By promoting chondrogenesis, the subject compounds can be used to particularly addresses this problem, by causing the implanted cells to become more adaptive to the new environment and effectively resemble hypertrophic chondrocytes of an earlier developmental stage of the tissue. Thus, the action of chondrogensis in the implanted tissue, as provided by the subject compounds, and the mechanical forces on the actively remodeling tissue can synergize to produce an improved implant more suitable for the new function to which it is to be put.
In similar fashion, the subject method can be applied to enhancing both the generation of prosthetic cartilage devices and to their implantation. The need for improved treatment has motivated research aimed at creating new cartilage that is based on collagen- glycosaminoglycan templates (Stone et al. (1990) Clin Orthop Relat Red 252:129), isolated chondrocytes (Grande et al. (1989) J Orthop Res 7:208; and Takigawa et al. (1987) Bone Miner 2:449), and chondrocytes attached to natural or synthetic polymers (Walitani et al. (1989) J Bone Jt Surg 71B:74; Vacanti et al. (1991) Plast Reconstr Surg 88:753; von Schroeder et al. (1991) J Biomed Mater Res 25:329; Freed et al. (1993) J Biomed Mater Res 27:11; and the Vacanti et al. U.S. Patent No. 5,041,138). For example, chondrocytes can be grown in culture on biodegradable, biocompatible highly porous scaffolds formed from polymers such as polyglycolic acid, polylactic acid, agarose gel, or other polymers which degrade over time as function of hydrolysis of the polymer backbone into innocuous monomers. The matrices are designed to allow adequate nutrient and gas exchange to the cells until engraftment occurs. The cells can be cultured in vitro until adequate cell volume and density has developed for the cells to be implanted. One advantage of the matrices is that they can be cast or molded into a desired shape on an individual basis, so that the final product closely resembles the patient's own ear or nose (by way of example), or flexible matrices can be used which allow for manipulation at the time of implantation, as in a joint.
In one embodiment, the implants are contacted with a petidomimetic of the present invention during the culturing process in order to induce and/or maintain differentiated chondrocytes in the culture and to further stimulate cartilage matrix production within the implant. In such a manner, the cultured cells can be caused to maintain a phenotype typical of a chondrogenic cell (i.e. hypertrophic), and hence continue the population of the matrix and production of cartilage tissue.
In yet a further embodiment, the subject compounds can be used to prevent osteoclastic bone resorption, such as which occurs during postmenopausal osteoporosis. Such a therapy would be directed at the action of τp6 -src, or downstream transduction proteins, which has been shown to be required and essential for osteoclastic bone resorption (Yoneda et al. (1993) J Clin Invest 91 :2791-2795; and Tanaka et al. (1993) FEBS Lett 313:85-89). In a preferred embodiment, the therapeutic preparation contains a peptide or peptidomimetic which inhibits osteoclastic bone resorption, and a second agent which stimulates new bone formation. There are several indications that integrins may mediate the differentiation of osteoblasts, analagous to the stimulation of chondroblasts, suggesting that the subject compounds can be used to induce bone formation.
The subject compounds also have utility in production of transgenic animals. In particular, the compounds of the present invention can be use to offset detrimental side effects associated with overexpression of a recombinant protein in the tissue or bodily fluid of a transgenic animal. For instance, the present inhibitors can be used to prevent detrimental consequences associated with overexpression of a growth factor, or to prevent hyperinsulinema in transgenic animals producing recombinant insulin. Use of the present inhibitors to this end can facilitate tolerance to increased levels of recombinant protein production, and thereby increase the yield per animal.
The subject compounds can also be used as speciality chemicals, such as to facilitate the dissection of intracellular signalling pathways. For example, since the discovery of insulin and its receptor, the downstream elements responsible for the pleiotropic insulin signal have been difficult to define. Utilizing the present compounds, particular pathways originating from the insulin receptor can be inhibited in order to ascertain the role of each signal pathway in the biological repsonse of the cell to insulin.
In yet another embodiment, the subject compounds can be utilized in an insecticide formulation, such as to destroy fruit flies. For example, inhibitors of the SH2-containing proteins corkscrew or Dsrc, can be used to kill Drosphilia. The substituents on the azepine core can be chosen so as to maximize absorption by mature flies or by larva.
The invention now being generally described, it will be more readily understood by reference to the following examples which are included merely for purposes of illustration of certain aspects and embodiments of the present invention, and are not intended to limit the invention.
Example 1 < -Hydroxy-N-benzyloxycarbonylglycine (22 A) Benzyl carbamate (63g, .05mol) was stirred with glyoxylic acid monohydrate (5.09g, .055mol) in dry ether (50mL). The crystalline product 22A (7.8 lg, 73%) formed was filtered and washed with ether.
Example 2 α -(Isopropylthio)-N-(benzyloxycarbonyl) glycine (22B) α-hydroxy-N-benzyloxycarbonylglycine 22A (5.57g, .027mol) of Example 1 was stirred with isopropylmercaptan (8.29g, .l lmol) in glacial acetic acid (26.5mL) at 0°C. Cone H2SO4 (.27mL) was added and the mixture stirred for 2 days at room temperature. The mixture was then poured into ice and the organic layer extracted with ethyl acetate. The ethyl acetate solution was washed with water, 5% NaHCO3, dried over MgSO4, solvent removed to give 22B in 94% yield. This was used without further purification.
Example 3 2-[N-( -(Isopropylthio)-N-(benzyloxycarbonyl)-glycinyl)aminoJbenzophenone (24) α-(isopropylthio)-N-(benyloxycarbonyl)glycine 22B was dissolved in methylene chloride (200mL) under nitrogen atmosphere at 0°C in a three necked flask carrying an additional funnel. To the stirred solution was added N-methylmoφholine (2.1 lmL, 19.3mmol) followed by isobutylchloroformate (2.48mL, 19.2mmol). This was stirred for 15 minutes at 0 °C and then heated to reflux. To the refluxing reaction mixture was added a solution of 2- aminobenzophenone 21 (3.59g, 18.19mmol) in dry methylene chloride (26mL) over 20 minutes. The reaction mixture was stirred for 20 more minutes after the addition and then left stirring overnight at room temperature. The reaction mixture was washed with 10% citric acid, saturated sodium bicarbonate solution and brine, then dried over magnesium sulphate. Solvent evaporated at reduced pressure to give 9.30g of the crude product 24. This was used without further purification.
Example 4 2-f-(a-Amino-N -(benzylcarbonyl)glycinyl)aminoJ-benzophenone (25). The crude product 2Λ (9.3g, 20:17mmol) was dissolved in 133mL of dry tetrahydrafuran. This solution was saturated with ammonia at 0°C for 30 minutes and then mercuric chloride (6g, 22.09mmol) was added in one portion to the stirred solution while ammonia gas was bubbled through the solution. After bubbling ammonia gas for 2 hours at 0°C it was bubbled for an additional hour at room temperature. The suspended solids were filtered and the solvent evaporated to yield 25 (9.7g) which was used without further purification.
Example 5 1 ,3-Dihydro-5-phenyl-3(R,S)-[ (benzyloxycarbonyl) -amino]- 2H-l,4-benzodiazepin-2-one (26). Crude α-amino-glycinamide 25 (9.7g, 24.04mmol) was dissolved in 182mL of glacial acetic acid, and ammonium acetate (8.73g, 113.37mmol) was added to this solution under nitrogen atmosphere, with the resulting reaction mixture stirred overnight under dry conditions. This mixture was concentrated under reduced pressure and stirred with 105mL ethyl acetate and 25mL IN sodium hydroxide solution for 30 minutes. The solid formed was filtered and washed with ethyl acetate to give the pure diazepine 2£. The ethyl acetate washings was further concentrated to give an additional amount of product and washings further purified on flash column chromatography on silica gel ( 40%ethyl acetate ,60%hexane). The final yield of pure product was 5.89g (75.2% yield from 2-aminobenzophenone).
Example 6 l,3Dihydro-5-phenyl-l-(ethoxy carbonyl methyl)-(R,S)-[(benzyloxycarbonyl)-amino] 2H-1,4- benzodiazepin-2-one (27). Sodium hydride (60% suspension in mineral oil) (.53g, 13.5mmol) was stirred with dry dimethyl formamide (3mL) under argon atmosphere in an ice bath. To this was added the benzodiazepine 26 of Example 5 (5g, 12.98mmol) in DMF (12mL) and the mixture was stirred for 40 minutes at 0°C. Ethyl bromoacetate (1.47mL, 2.22g, 13.3mmol) was added to this and the mixture stirred further for an hour at 0°C , then overnight at room temperature. The solvent was removed in vacuo and the residue treated with ice and extracted with dichloromethane (150x3 mL). The dichloromethane extracts were washed with water, brine and dried over magnesium sulphate to give 6g of the 1 -substituted diazepine 22. This was saponified without further purification.
Example 7 1 (Carboxymethyl)-l ,3-Dihydro-5-phenyl-3(R,S)-[(benzyloxycarbonyl)-amino] 2H-1 ,4- benzodiazepin-2-one (29) Crude product 22 of Example 6 (6g, 12.73mmol) was dissolved in dioxane (15mL) and water (15mL) and cooled in an ice bath. 2N sodium hydroxide was added to this solution till pH of the solution reached 10. The heterogenous mixture was stirred at room temperature until it became homogenous. The homogenous layer was extracted with ether, and the aqueous layer acidified to pH 2 using 4N HC1. This was extracted with dichloromethane (150x3 mL), and dried over magnesium sulphate to give 5.52g of 29 (95% yield from compound 26) as a pure white solid.
Example 8
1 ,3-Dihydro-5-phenyl-l-[(methoxy isoleucyl) -car boxy methyl [-5 -phenyl-3-R, S-
[(benzoxycarbonyl)-amino] 2H-1 ,4-benzodiazepin-2-one (30) To the benzodiazepin-2-one 22 (0.55g, 1.23mmol), in tetrahydrofuran (4mL) at -20°C under argon, was added NMM (0.14mL, 1.23mmol) followed by isobutylchloroformate (9.16mL, 1.23mmol). The mixture was stirred for 5 minutes, and then 0.14mL (1.23mmol) of NMM was added, followed by isoleucine methyl ester (.22g, 1.23mmol) in tetrahydrafuran. This solution was stirred for 1 hour at -20°C, then 2 hours at room temperature. Tetrahydrafuran was removed in vacuum and the resulting solid was dissolved in ethylacetate, and the salts filtered off. The ethyl acetate extract was washed with 5% citric acid, 5% sodium bicarbonate solution, water, brine and dried over MgSO4- Solvent evaporated to give 0.70g of the crude 2-isoleucyl diazepine 10. This was chromatographed on silica gel column using 40% ethyl acetate/60% hexane to give 0.59g of pure 10 (92% yield).
Example 9 3(R,S)-Amino-l, 3-dihydro-l-[(methoxy isoleucyl) carboxymethyl]-5-phenyl-2H-l , 4- benzodiazepin-2-one (31) Compound 3O (0.59g, 1.02mmol) was dissolved in 15mL of methanol under argon atmosphere. 10%Pd/C (0.05g) was added and then the system was evacuated, and twice flushed with argon and twice with hydrogen before hydrogenation was started. The mixture was allowed to stir overnight with hydrogen from a balloon. It was then cautiously filtered using a sintered glass funnel carrying filter agent. The residue was washed with warm methanol twice and the filtrate was evaporated in vacuum to give the deprotected compound H (0.41g, 91% yield).
Example 10 1 ,3-Dihydro-l -[(methoxy isoleucyl)carbonylmethyl]-5-phenyl-3 (R,S)-{ [(N-fluorenylmethoxy carbonyl) -phosphonotyrosyl] dimethyl ester-amino}-2H-l,4-benzodiazepin-2-one (32). N-Fmoc phosphotyrosine dimethyl ester (.14g, 0.28mmol) was stirred with THF under argon at -20°C. To this was added NMM (0.03mL,0.28mmol) and isobutylchloroformate (0.04mL, 0.28mmol) and stirred for 5 minutes. To this was further added NMM (0.03mL, 0.28mmol) and compound H (0.12g, 0.28mmol) in 3mL of DMF and stirred for lh at -20°C and 2h at room temperature. Solvent evaporated under vacuum and the remaining solid was dissolved in ethyl acetate and filtered. Ethyl acetate extracts were washed with 5% citric acid, 5% NaHC03, water, brine and dried over MgSO4. Solvent evaporated to give crude 12 (0.25g) which was purified on column chromatography using .5% ethanol in ethyl acetate.
Example 11
1 ,3-Dihydro-l - [(methoxy-L-isoleucyl) carbonylmethyl)-5-phenyl-3(R,S)-{[(N- fluorenylmethoxy carbonyl)phosphono-L-tyrosyl]amino}-2H-l, 4-benzodiazepin-2-one (33). To a solution of isobutylene in 3mL of dichloromethane (prepared by bubbling isobutylene for 10 minutes) was added bromo trimethyl silane (0.038mL, 0.29mmol). After 5 minutes compound 12 (0.05g, 0.05mmol) in lmL of dichloromethane was added, and the mixture left stirring overnight at room temperature. The dichloromethane was evaporated from the reaction mixture, which was then evaporated twice from chloroform and from 2mL of methanol to give solid H (0.03g, 62.5%) which was dried under vacuum. This was further purified using analytical C18 HPLC using acetonitrile\ water as solvent system..
Example 12 l,3-Dihydro-l-[(methoxy-L-isoleucyl)carbonylmethyl)-5-phenyl-3(R,S)-[(phosphono-L- tyrosyl) dimethyl ester amino]-2H-l,4-benzodiazepin-2-one (34)
Compound 12 (0.13g, 0.14mmol) was dissolved in DMF and 0.046mL (0.46mmol) of piperdine was added and the mixture was stirred for 0.5 hours. The the solvent was removed and the remaining solid was washed with hexane and dried in vaccum to give 0.095g (97%) of 14-
Example 13 l,3-Dihydro-l-[(methoxy-L-isoleucyl)carbonylmethyl)-5-phenyl-3(R,S)-{[(N-acetyl)- phosphono—tyrosyl) dimethyl ester amino]-2H-l,4-benzodiazepin-2-one (35) To the compound 14 (0.10 mg, 0.14mmol), in dry THF at -20°C, was added NMM (O.OlβmL, 0.14mmol), followed by acetyl chloride (0.01 lmL, 0.14mmol) in THF. This was stirred at -20°C for lh and room temperature overnight. Solvent was removed under vacuum and the remaining solid dissolved in ethyl acetate and washed with water and dried over magnesium sulphate. Solvent was evaporated and crude 15 (.09g,85%) was purified using HPLC, .5% ethanol/ethyl acetate.
Example 14 l,3Dihydro-l-[(methoxy-L-isoleucyl)-carbonylmethyl)-5-phenyl-3(R,S)-{[(N-acetyl)- phosphono-L-tyrosyl]amino}-2H-l,4 -benzodiazepin-2-one (36) To isobutylene in dichloromethane (3mL) was added bromotrimethyl silane ("TMSB", 0.027mL, 0.24mmol) and stirred for 5 minutes. To this was added compound 5 (.033g, 0.04mmol) in lmL of dichlormethane and stirred overnight at room temperature. Solvent was removed, and evaporated twice with chloroform and then any methanol was removed to give 16(0.022g ,69%). This was purified on analytical HPLC C18 column using water acetonitrile as solvent system and the diasteromers separated.
Example 15 Demonstration of the effect of (36) on Middle T/fyn interaction Approximately lOμg of a GST-Fyn fusion protein bound to lOμl of glutathione- Sepharose beads were incubated with 90μl of buffer (TEB, pH 9.0) and lOμl of DMSO or DMSO containing an isomer (#1 or #2) of compound 16 (lanes 2 and 3 equal 3.95x10'^M; lane 4 equals 1.32X10~4M; lane 5 equals 3.95xl0"^M). Lane 1 contains no inhibitor. The lanes labeled "MT 315" (lanes 6 and 7) are reaction mixutures as above, but having 20μg of peptide (middle T residues EEYMPMED) instead of the benzodiazepine 16. The label "pY" indicates the peptide was phosphorylated, while unphosphoryalated peptide is designated as "-". The reaction mixtures were incubated for 1 hour, then 100 μL 32p_ιaDeιι Middle T (polyoma), prepared from baculovirus co-expression of middle T and src in Sf9 cells, were added to each reaction and incubated for 1 hour more at 4°C. The sepharose was washed with twice with PBS, and once with distilled water, boiled in SDS dissociation buffer, and run on a 7.5% acrylamide SDS gel. Labeled MT was visualized on the gel by autoradiography, and the inhibition of MT/fyn interaction determined. While both isomers of 36 displayed inhibitory action, Figure 6 illustrates that isomer #2 is a more potent inhibitor of the SH2 mediated interaction of middle T and fyn.
Example 16 Demonstration of the effect of (36) and (33) on SH2 interactions In order to assess the inhibitory activity of the present peptidomimetics, the ability of the subject compounds to inhibit the interaction between a specific peptide and an SH2 domain was determined. Various SH2 domains were subcloned in frame with the glutathione-S-transferase affinity tag of the pGEX vector system (Pharmacia catalog no. PGEX-4T-3). The resulting pGEX-E2 construct encoded a glutathione-S-transferase (GST)/SH2 fusion protein (Smith et al. (1988) Gene 67:31-40). The pGEX construct was introduced into E.coli by transfromation, and the transformants grown in liquid media (LB) in the presence of IPTG. Purification of GST/E2 fusion protein was by standard protocols {Current Protocols in Molecular Biology, eds. Ausubel et al. (NY: John Wiley & Sons, 1991); Pharmacia instruction booklet (for catalog no. 27-4570)) using a glutathione-sepharose column (Pharmacia catalog no. 27-4570). Briefly, the cells were pelleted and resuspended in buffer A (50mM TRIS (pH7.5), 2mM EDTA, 250mM NaCl, 5% glycerol (V/V), 1% Tween (V/V), 1% Triton X 100 (V/V)), to which 2mM PMSF and 15mM 2-mercaptoethanol were added. Bacteria were mechanically disrupted by sonication or by microfluidizer, and the soluble fraction of the lysate was absorbed with glutathione-agarose beads which had been rehydrated in buffer A. Absorption was for 30 minutes to 14 hours at 4°C during which the beads were maintained in suspension by rocking. Subsequently, the beads were washed 3 times in cold buffer A followed by 5 washes in 50mM Tris, pH 8.0 The peptide against which the subject compounds were tested was of the sequence EPQYEEIPIYL. In one instance, in order to detect the peptide it was labeled using conjugated with FITC. The protocol for the conjugation of proteins with amine reactive probes (Molecular Probes) was followed. Briefly, lOmgs of FITC in lOOμL of DMSO was added dropwise to lOmgs of peptide. The material was incubated for lhr at room temperature with shaking. lOOμL of fresh 1.5M hydroxylamine pH 8.0, was added to the reaction mix and the incubation continued for 30 minutes. The incorporated label was separated from unincorporated by chromatography in a cl8 column with typical TFAlacetonitrile buffers, using conditions described above. Peptide containing peaks were identified by their ability to specifically bind to the appropriate SH2 domain. For subsequent studies, the peptide was labeled before cleavage from the support resin used for its synthesis.
The IDEXX lck-SH2 binding assay was carried out employing the GST-SH2 fusion protein, the FITC-labeled peptide, and a sample peptidomimetic of the present invention which was N-protected with either an FMOC moiety (H of Figure 2D) or acetyl moiety (36 of Figure 2D). Briefly, the SH2 -beads were wash 3 times with cold (4°C) Tris Buffered Saline (TBS), and centrifuged (5 min., 2000g, 4°C) between washes. The bead pellet was resuspended in TBS, diluting the beads 1/20 (v/v). The beads are subsequently kept cold before use.
The lyophilized FITC-peptide was resuspended in TBS into the volume before lyophilization (1 ml/tube), and then diluted 1/20 into TBS. The FITC-peptide was subsequently kept cold and protected from light.
Into the wells of an IDEXX microtiter plate (IDEXX Laboratories, Inc., Cat. No. 22- 400-1, Fluoricon -CA Assay Plates) was added (i) 10 μL/well diluted SH2-beads; (ii) 10 μL/well diluted FITC-peptide solution; (iii) 20 μL/well of a solution containing the subject inhibitor or a control solution (with triplicate wells for each). The 100% SH2-peptide binding control (e.g. no inhibition) was 20μL TBS. The zero SH2-peptide binding control (e.g. 100% inhibition) was 20μL of a 200mM solution of phenyl phosphate. The peptidomimetic was added in varying concentrations to yield the final concentrations as indicated in Figure 7. The contents of each well were pipeted up and down with a multi-channel pipetter to mix, and then incubated 5-60 mins at room temperature and protected from the light.
The assay plates were then placed in the Idexx instrument and a vacuum at 25 inches Hg was applied until all of the liquid was removed from the wells. The vacuum was then shut-off and the plates washed with TBS. The vacuum was applied again to aspirate the TBS wash, and which was repeated once. The plates were then analyzed for FITC-labeled peptide binding, and the percent inhibition determined by the ability of the subject peptidomimetic to inhibit binding of the FITC-labeled peptide. The inhibition data was plotted, as shown in Figure 7. As indicated by Figure 7, the FMOC-derivative exhibited an IC50 in the present system of 48.2μM, and the Ac-derivative had an IC50 of 270.9μM.
Example 17 p-Boronophenylalanine can be synthesized by the scheme illustrated in Figure 5D. Accordingly, from p-bromotoluene £1 by Grignard reaction and treatment with triethylborate at -78 °C followed by hydrolysis gave p-boronotoluene £2- This on bromination and oxidation gave £4 according to Snyder et al. (1958) / Am Chem Soc 80:835-838. Further treatment with N-methyldiethanolamine in THF afforded the cyclic boronate, which on reaction with ethylisocyanate and sodium hydride at -70°-20°C gave (Z)-ethyl α-formyl cinnamate derivative 6- Catalytic hydrogenation of £6 gave boronophenylalanine ethyl ester derivative £Z- Finally, £Z was treated with sodium hydroxide and HCI in one pot to afford boronophenylalanine.
Example 18 As shown in Figure 5E, p-bromobenzaldehyde 91 is converted to its acetyl 22. Further treatment with Mg converted 22 to its Grignard reagent, and reaction with triethyl borate and sulfuric acid yielded p-boronobenzaldehyde _____.. This reaction sequence is based on a similar reaction by Matteson et al. (1983) Organometallics 2:1529-35. The compound 24 can be further converted to p-boronophenylalanine as described in Example 17. Moreover, if will be appreciated that, as illustrated by Figure 5F, p- boronomethylphenylalanine, p-boronoethyl-2-phenylalanine and other boronoalkyls can be prepared by similar reactions.
Example 19 Figure 5G illustrates another reaction scheme for synthesis of p-boronomethyl- phenylalanine and the like. Iodomethananeboronate 101 can be prepared according to uts et al. (1982) / Organometallic Chem 234:137-141. This can be converted to the corresponding zinc halide, and then to the more reactive copper derivative by reaction with CuCN-2LiCl in by adaption of the procedure of Knochel, P (1990) J Am Chem Soc 112:7 '431-7 '433. This product, on reaction with p-bromobenzaldehyde will give the corresponding boronate 103 which can be further converted to p-boronomethyl- phenylalanine 104 or the like.
Example 20 As illustrated by Figure 5H, tyrosine benzyl ester 111 can be converted to N- acetyltyrosine benzyl ester (2) using acetic anhydride, with the hydroxy group of the tyrosine being transformed into the trifluoromethyl sufonyl derivative 113 by using phenyl bis[(trifluoromethyl)sulfonyl] amine. Compound 113 this can be coupled to vinyltributyltin in the presence of bis(triphenylphosphine)palladium dichloride and lithium chloride to give the 4-ethenylphenylalanine derivative 114. This product, on refluxing with catechol borane and further transesterification with pinanediol, gives p- boronoethyl-2-phenylalanine derivative 116. Catalytic hydrogenation affords 117, which can be further coupled to yield the desired peptide or peptidomimetic.
Example 21 The boronic acids can be further treated with pinanediol to give the corresponding boronate esters shown in Figure 51. These were further acetylated using acetic anhydride, and then coupled to peptides either using a peptide synthesizer or manually to the peptide attached to the resin following standard peptide synthesis schemes using standard conditions. These peptides were cleaved from the resin using 5% water in TFA and further purified by HPLC.
All of the above-cited references and publications are hereby incorporated by reference.
Equivalents
Those skilled in the art will recognize, or be able to ascertain using no more than routine experimentation, numerous equivalents to the peptidomimetics and methods of use thereof described herein. Such equivalents are considered to be within the scope of this invention and are covered by the following claims.

Claims

A compound represented by a general formula:
Figure imgf000064_0001
wherein
A represents a fused ring selected from a group consisting of a cycloalkyl, a cycloakenyl, an aryl, and a heterocyclic ring, said fused ring comprising from 4 to 8 atoms in a ring structure, wherein said fused ring can be substituted or unsubstituted;
R] represents hydrogen, a halogen, a lower alkyl, a lower alkenyl, a lower alkynyl, a carboxyl, an azido, -(CH2)m-R7, -(CH2)m-OH, -(CH2)m-O-lower alkyl, -(CH2)m-O-lower alkenyl, -(CH2)n-O-(CH2)m-R7, -(CH2)m-SH, -(CH2)m-S-lower alkyl, -(CH2)m-S-lower alkenyl, -(CH2)n-S-(CH2)m-R7,
Figure imgf000064_0002
O O O
(CH2)m-C-lower alkyl , — (CH2)m-C-lower alkenyl , — (CH2)m-C-Y ,
p O
-(CH2)n-C-(CH2)lir-R7 , or — (CH2)m-C-O-R« ;
R2 represents an electron lone pair, hydrogen, an lower alkyl, an lower alkenyl, an lower alkynyl, a carboxyl, -(CH2)m-R7, -(CH2)m-OH, -(CH2)m-O-lower alkyl, -(CH2)m-O- lower alkenyl, -(CH2)n-O-(CH2)m-R7, -(CH2)p-SH, -(CH2)p-S-lower alkyl, -(CH2)p-S-lower alkenyl, -(CH2)p-S-(CH2)m-R7, — (CH2)p — N
Figure imgf000065_0001
O O O
-(CH )m-C-lower alkyl , — (CH2)m-C-lower alkenyl , — (CH2)m-C-Y ,
O O
— (CH2)n-C-(CH2)ri R7 , or — (CH2)m-C-O-R6 ;
R3 represents an N-terminally linked amino acid residue or peptide;
R4 and R5 each independently represent hydrogen, lower alkyl, lower alkenyl, -(CH2)m-R7, -C(O)-lower alkyl, -C(O)-lower alkenyl, -C(O)-(CH2)m-R7, or R and R5 taken together with the N atom to which they are attached complete a heterocyclic ring having from 4 to 8 atoms in the ring structure;
R6 represents hydrogen, a lower alkyl, an lower alkenyl, R7, -(CH2)p-R7, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt forming ion;
R7 represents an aryl, a cycloalkyl, a cycloakenyl, or a heterocycle;
Rg represents hydrogen, a halogen, a lower alkyl, a lower alkenyl, a lower alkynyl, a carboxyl, an azido, -(CH2)m-R7, -(CH2)m-OH, -(CH2)m-O-lower alkyl, -(CH2)m-O-lower alkenyl, -(CH2)n-O-(CH2)m-R7, -(CH2)m-SH, -(CH2)m-S-lower alkyl, -(CH2)m-S-lower
Figure imgf000065_0002
O O O
II II II
— (CH2)m-C-lower alkyl ? — (CH2)m-C-lower alkenyl , — (CH2)m-C-Y ,
O O
— (CH2)n-C-(CH2)ri R7 , or — (CH2)m-C-O-R6 ;
R9 is absent, hydrogen, or a lower alkyl;
Rt3 represents hydrogen, or a lower alkyl; R]4 is absent or represents one or more substituents selected from a halogen, a lower alkyl, a lower alkoxy, a lower alkylthio, -NO2, -CF3, -CN, and -OH;
Rj7 is absent, or represents an amino-terminal blocking group, a C-terminally linked amino acid residue or peptide;
X represents O or S; Y represents hydrogen, a lower alkyl, -(CH2)m-OH, -(CH2)m-O- lower alkyl, a carboxyl, an amine, an amide, a nitrosyl, a sulfhydryl, a sulfonyl, or a sulfonamide;
Z represents C or N;
P-Tyr represents a phosphotyrosine or a phosphotyrosine analog, the carboxyl group of said phosphotyrosine being linked by an peptide bond to the 3 -amino group of said azepine;
n is zero or an integer in the range of 1 to 6; m is zero or an integer in the range of 1 to 6; and p is an integer in the range of 1 to 6.
2. The compound of claim 1, wherein A is selected from a group consisting of benzene, pyrrole, furan, thiphene, imidazole, oxazole, thiazole, pyrazole, pyrazine, pyridine, and pyrimidine.
3. The compound of claim 1, wherein Rj is selected from a group consisting of -(CH2)m-benzyl, -(CH2)n-S-(CH2)m-benzyl, -(CH2)n-O-(CH2)m-benzyl, -(CH2)m-pyridyl, -(CH2)n-S-(CH2)m-pyridyl, and -(CH )n-O-(CH2)m -pyridyl, wherein each of said benzyl and pyridyl moieties can be substituted at one or more positions with a halogen, a lower alkyl, a lower alkoxy ,a lower alkylthio, -NO2, -CF3, -CN, and -OH.
4. The compound of claim 1, wherein R3 is an amino acid selected from a group consisting of leucine, isoleucine, methionine, proline, valine, aspartic acid, and asparagine.
5. The compound of claim 1, wherein R3 comprises an amino acid residue or peptide residue which is protected with a carboxy-terminal blocking group.
6. The compound of claim 1, wherein PTyr is represented by the general formula
Figure imgf000067_0001
,and Y is selected from a group consisting of
Figure imgf000067_0002
, _(CH2)m-BeF3 , and — (CH2)m-AlF3
Figure imgf000067_0003
wherein m is zero or an integer in the range of 1 to 6; X is absent or represents O, S, or N; Dj represents O or S; D2 represents N3, SH2, NH2, or NO2; and R15 and Rjg each independently represent hydrogen, a lower alkyl, or a pharmeceutically acceptable salt, or R15 and Rjg taken together with the O-P-O, O-B-O, O-V-O or O-As-O atoms to which they are attached complete a heterocyclic ring having from 5 to 8 atoms in the ring structure.
7. The compound of claim 1, wherin Rj7 further comprises an N-terminal blocking group.
8. The compound of claim 1, selected from a group consisting of l,3-Dihydro-l-[(L- isoleucyl)-carbonylmethyl)-5-phenyl-3(R,S)-{[(N-acetyl)-phosphono-L-tyrosyl]amino}-2H- 1 ,4-benzodiazepin-2-one; 1 ,3-Dihydro-l -[(L-methionyl)-carbonylmethyl)-5-phenyl-3(R,S)- { [(N-acetyl)-phosphono-L-tyrosyl]amino}-2H- 1 ,4-benzodiazepin-2-one; 1 ,3-Dihydro-l -[(L- leucyl)-carbonylmethyl)-5-phenyl-3(R,S)- { [(N-acetyl)-phosphono-L-tyrosyl]amino } -2H- 1 ,4- benzodiazepin-2-one; l,3-Dihydro-l-[(L-prolyl)-carbonylmethyl)-5-phenyl-3(R.S)-{[(N- acetyl)-phosphono-L-tyrosyl]amino}-2H-l ,4-benzodiazepin-2-one; 1 ,3-Dihydro-l -[(L-valyl)- carbonylmethyl)-5-phenyl-3(R,S)- { [(N-acetyl)-phosphono-L-tyrosyljamino } -2H- 1 ,4- benzodiazepin-2-one; l,3-Dihydro-l-[(L-aspartyl)-carbonylmethyl)-5-phenyl-3(R,S)-{[(N- acetyl)-phosphono-L-tyrosyl]amino}-2H-l,4-benzodiazepin-2-one; l,3-Dihydro-l-[(L- asparginyl)-carbonylmethyl)-5-phenyl-3 (R,S)- { [(N-acetyl)-phosphono-L-tyrosyljamino } -2H- l,4-benzodiazepin-2-one; l,3-Dihydro-l-[(L-isoleucyl)-carbonylmethyl)-5-phenyl-3(R,S)-
{ [(N-acetyl)-4-boronylphenylalanine] amino } -2H- 1 ,4-benzodiazepin-2-one; 1 ,3-Dihydro- 1 - [(L-methionyl)-carbonylmethyl)-5-phenyl-3(R,S)-{[(N-acetyl)-4- boronylphenylalanine]amino}-2H-l,4-benzodiazepin-2-one; l,3-Dihydro-l-[(L-leucyl)- carbonylmethyl)-5-phenyl-3 (R,S)- { [(N-acetyl)-4-boronylphenylalanine]amino } -2H- 1 ,4- benzodiazepin-2-one; l,3-Dihydro-l-[(L-prolyl)-carbonylmethyl)-5-phenyl-3(R,S)-{[(N- acetyl)-4-boronylphenylalanine]amino } -2H- 1 ,4-benzodiazepin-2-one; 1 ,3-Dihydro- 1 -[(L- valyl)-carbonylmethyl)-5-phenyl-3(R,S)-{[(N-acetyl)-4-boronylphenylalanine]amino}-2H- l,4-benzodiazepin-2-one; l,3-Dihydro-l-[(L-aspartyl)-carbonylmethyl)-5-phenyl-3(R,S)- { [(N-acetyl)-4-boronylphenylalanine] amino } -2H- 1 ,4-benzodiazepin-2-one; 1 ,3-Dihydro- 1 - [(L-asparginyl)-carbonylmethyl)-5-phenyl-3(R,S)-{[(N-acetyl)-4- boronylphenylalanine]amino}-2H-l,4-benzodiazepin-2-one; l,3-Dihydro-l-[(L-isoleucyl)- carbonylmethyl)-5 -phenyl-3 (R,S)- { [(N-acetyl)-4-arsenylphenylalanine]amino } -2H- 1 ,4- benzodiazepin-2-one; 1 ,3-Dihydro- 1 -[(L-methionyl)-carbonylmethyl)-5-phenyl-3 (R,S)- { [(N- acetyl)-4-arsenylphenylalanine]amino } -2H- 1 ,4-benzodiazepin-2-one; 1 ,3 -Dihydro- 1 - [(L- leucyl)-carbonylmethyl)-5 -phenyl-3 (R, S)- { [(N-acety l)-4-arseny lphenylalanine] amino } -2H- 1 ,4-benzodiazepin-2-one; l,3-Dihydro-l-[(L-prolyl)-carbonylmethyl)-5-phenyl-3(R,S)-{[(N- acety l)-4-arseny lphenylalanine] amino }-2H-l ,4-benzodiazepin-2-one; 1 ,3-Dihydro-l -[(L- valyl)-carbonylmethyl)-5-phenyl-3(R,S)-{[(N-acetyl)-4-arsenylphenylalanine]amino}-2H- l,4-benzodiazepin-2-one; l,3-Dihydro-l-[(L-aspartyl)-carbonylmethyl)-5-phenyl-3(R,S)- { [(N-acetyl)-4-arsenylphenylalanine]amino}-2H-l ,4-benzodiazepin-2-one; 1 ,3 -Dihydro- 1 - [(L-asparginyl)-carbonylmethyl)-5-phenyl-3(R,S)-{[(N-acetyl)-4- arsenylphenylalaninejamino } -2H- 1 ,4-benzodiazepin-2-one; 1 ,3 -Dihydro- 1 -[(L-isoleucyl)- carbony lmethyl)-5 -phenyl-3 (R, S)- { [(N-acety l)-4-phosphonomethy lphenylalanine] amino } - 2H-l,4-benzodiazepin-2-one; l,3-Dihydro-l-[(L-methionyl)-carbonylmethyl)-5-phenyl- 3(R,S)- { [(N-acetyl)-4-phosphonomethylphenylalanine]amino } -2H- 1 ,4-benzodiazepin-2-one; l,3-Dihydro-l-[(L-leucyl)-carbonylmethyl)-5-phenyl-3(R,S)-{[(N-acetyl)-4- phosphonomethylphenylalanine]amino} -2H- 1 ,4-benzodiazepin-2-one; 1 ,3-Dihydro- 1 -[(L- prolyl)-carbonylmethyl)-5-phenyl-3(R,S)-{[(N-acetyl)-4- phosphonomethylphenylalaninejamino } -2H- 1 ,4-benzodiazepin-2-one; 1 ,3-Dihydro- 1 -[(L- valyl)-carbonylmethyl)-5-phenyl-3(R,S)-{[(N-acetyl)-4- phosphonomethylphenylalaninejamino} -2H- 1 ,4-benzodiazepin-2-one; 1 ,3-Dihydro- 1 -[(L- aspartyl)-carbonylmethyl)-5-phenyl-3(R,S)-{[(N-acetyl)-4- phosphonomethylphenylalanine]amino}-2H-l,4-benzodiazepin-2-one; 1,3 -Dihydro- 1- [(L- asparginyl)-carbonylmethyl)-5-phenyl-3(R,S)-{[(N-acetyl)-4- phosphonomethylphenylalanine]amino}-2H-1.4-benzodiazepin-2-one; l,3-Dihydro-l-[(L- isoleucyl)-carbonylmethyl)-5-phenyl-3(R,S)-{[(N-acetyl)-4-vanadylphenylalanine]amino}- 2H- 1 ,4-benzodiazepin-2-one; 1 ,3-Dihydro- 1 -[(L-methionyl)-carbonylmethyl)-5-phenyl- 3(R,S)-{[(N-acetyl)-4-vanadylphenylalanine]amino}-2H-l,4-benzodiazepin-2-one; 1,3- Dihydro-l-[(L-leucyl)-carbonylmethyl)-5-phenyl-3(R,S)-{[(N-acetyl)-4- vanady lphenylalanine] amino }-2H-l,4-benzodiazepin-2-one; l,3-Dihydro-l-[(L-prolyl)- carbonylmethyl)-5-phenyl-3(R,S)-{[(N-acetyl)-4-vanadylphenylalanine]amino}-2H-l,4- benzodiazepin-2-one; l,3-Dihydro-l-[(L-valyl)-carbonylmethyl)-5-phenyl-3(R,S)-{[(N- acetyl)-4-vanady lphenylalanine] amino } -2H- 1 ,4-benzodiazepin-2-one ; 1 ,3 -Dihydro- 1 - [(L- aspartyl)-carbonylmethyl)-5-phenyl-3(R,S)-{[(N-acetyl)-4-vanadylphenylalanine]amino}- 2H-l,4-benzodiazepin-2-one; l,3-Dihydro-l-[(L-asparginyl)-carbonylmethyl)-5-phenyl- 3 (R, S)- { [(N-acety l)-4- vanady lphenylalanine] amino } -2H- 1 ,4-benzodiazepin-2-one.
9. The compound of claim 1 , selected from a group consisting of 1 ,3 -Dihydro- 1 -[(L- isoleucyl)-carbonylmethyl)-5-phenyl-3(R,S)-{[(N-acetyl)-phosphono-L-tyrosyl]amino}-2H- 1 ,4-pyridodiazepin-2-one; 1 ,3-Dihydro-l -[(L-methionyl)-carbonylmethyl)-5-phenyl-3(R,S)- { [(N-acetyl)-phosphono-L-tyrosyl] amino }-2H- 1 ,4-pyridodiazepin-2-one; 1 ,3 -Dihydro- 1 -[(L- leucyl)-carbonylmethyl)-5-phenyl-3(R,S)-{[(N-acetyl)-phosphono-L-tyrosyl]amino}-2H-l,4- pyridodiazepin-2-one; 1 ,3-Dihydro- 1 -[(L-prolyl)-carbonylmethyl)-5-phenyl-3 (R,S)- { [(N- acetyl)-phosphono-L-tyrosyl]amino } -2H- 1 ,4-pyridodiazepin-2-one; 1 ,3-Dihydro- 1 -[(L- valyl)-carbonylmethyl)-5-phenyl-3(R,S)-{[(N-acetyl)-phosphono-L-tyrosyl]amino}-2H-l,4- pyridodiazepin-2-one; l,3-Dihydro-l-[(L-aspartyl)-carbonylmethyl)-5-phenyl-3(R,S)-{[(N- acetyl)-phosphono-L-tyrosyl]amino}-2H-l,4-pyridodiazepin-2-one; 1, 3 -Dihydro- 1-[(L- asparginyl)-carbonylmethyl)-5-phenyl-3(R,S)-{[(N-acetyl)-phosphono-L-tyrosyl]amino}-2H- 1 ,4-pyridodiazepin-2-one; l,3-Dihydro-l-[(L-isoleucyl)-carbonylmethyl)-5-phenyl-3(R,S)- { [(N-acetyl)-4-boronylphenylalanine]amino}-2H-l ,4-pyridodiazepin-2-one; 1 ,3 -Dihydro- 1 - [(L-methionyl)-carbonylmethyl)-5-phenyl-3(R,S)-{[(N-acetyl)-4- boronylphenylalanine]amino}-2H-l,4-pyridodiazepin-2-one; 1,3 -Dihydro- l-[(L-leucyl)- carbonylmethyl)-5-phenyl-3(R,S)- { [(N-acetyl)-4-boronylphenylalanine] amino } -2H- 1 ,4- pyridodiazepin-2-one; l,3-Dihydro-l-[(L-prolyl)-carbonylmethyl)-5-phenyl-3(R,S)-{[(N- acetyl)-4-boronylphenylalanine]amino} -2H- 1 ,4-pyridodiazepin-2-one; 1 ,3-Dihydro- 1 -[(L- valyl)-carbonylmethyl)-5-phenyl-3(R,S)-{[(N-acetyl)-4-boronylphenylalanine]amino}-2H- 1 ,4-pyridodiazepin-2-one; l,3-Dihydro-l-[(L-aspartyl)-carbonylmethyl)-5-phenyl-3(R,S)- { [(N-acetyl)-4-boronylphenylalanine]amino } -2H- 1 ,4-pyridodiazepin-2-one; 1 ,3 -Dihydro- 1 - [(L-asparginyl)-carbonylmethyl)-5-phenyl-3(R,S)-{[(N-acetyl)-4- boronylphenylalanine] amino } -2H- 1 ,4-pyridodiazepin-2-one; 1 ,3-Dihydro-l -[(L-isoleucyl)- carbonylmethyl)-5-phenyl-3(R,S)-{[(N-acetyl)-4-arsenylphenylalanine]amino}-2H-l,4- pyridodiazepin-2-one; 1 ,3-Dihydro- 1 -[(L-methionyl)-carbonylmethyl)-5-phenyl-3 (R,S)- { [(N- acetyl)-4-arseny lphenylalanine] amino }-2H-l,4-pyridodiazepin-2-one; 1, 3 -Dihydro- 1-[(L- leucyl)-carbonylmethyl)-5-phenyl-3(R,S)-{[(N-acetyl)-4-arsenylphenylalanine]amino}-2H- 1 ,4-pyridodiazepin-2-one; 1 ,3-Dihydro-l -[(L-prolyl)-carbonylmethyl)-5-phenyl-3(R,S)-{ [(N- acetyl)-4-arsenylphenylalanine]amino}-2H-l,4-pyridodiazepin-2-one; l,3-Dihydro-l-[(L- valyl)-carbonylmethyl)-5-phenyl-3(R,S)-{[(N-acetyl)-4-arsenylphenylalanine]amino}-2H- 1 ,4-pyridodiazepin-2-one; l,3-Dihydro-l-[(L-aspartyl)-carbonylmethyl)-5-phenyl-3(R,S)- { [(N-acetyl)-4-arseny lpheny lalanine] amino } -2H- 1 ,4-pyridodiazepin-2-one ; 1 ,3 -Dihydro- 1 - [(L-asparginy l)-carbony lmethy l)-5 -phenyl-3 (R, S)- { [(N-acety l)-4- arsenylphenylalaninejamino} -2H- 1 ,4-pyridodiazepin-2-one; 1 ,3-Dihydro- 1 -[(L-isoleucyl)- carbonylmethyl)-5-phenyl-3(R,S)-{[(N-acetyl)-4-phosphonomethylphenylalanine]amino}- 2H- 1 ,4-pyridodiazepin-2-one; 1 ,3-Dihydro- 1 -[(L-methionyl)-carbonylmethyl)-5-phenyl- 3(R,S)-{[(N-acetyl)-4-phosphonomethylphenylalanine]amino}-2H-l,4-pyridodiazepin-2-one; l,3-Dihydro-l-[(L-leucyl)-carbonylmethyl)-5-phenyl-3(R,S)-{[(N-acetyl)-4- phosphonomethylphenylalaninejamino} -2H- 1 ,4-pyridodiazepin-2-one; 1 ,3-Dihydro- 1 -[(L- prolyl)-carbonylmethyl)-5-phenyl-3(R,S)-{[(N-acetyl)-4- phosphonomethylphenylalanine]amino}-2H-l,4-pyridodiazepin-2-one; l,3-Dihydro-l-[(L- valyl)-carbonylmethyl)-5-phenyl-3(R,S)- { [(N-acetyl)-4- phosphonomethylphenylalaninejamino } -2H- 1 ,4-pyridodiazepin-2-one; 1 ,3-Dihydro- 1 -[(L- aspartyl)-carbonylmethyl)-5-phenyl-3 (R,S)- { [(N-acetyl)-4- phosphonomethylphenylalanine]amino}-2H-l ,4-pyridodiazepin-2-one; 1 ,3-Dihydro-l -[(L- asparginyl)-carbonylmethyl)-5-phenyl-3(R,S)-{[(N-acetyl)-4- phosphonomethylphenylalanine]amino } -2H- 1 ,4-pyridodiazepin-2-one; 1 ,3-Dihydro- 1 -[(L- isoleucyl)-carbonylmethyl)-5-phenyl-3(R,S)-{[(N-acetyl)-4-vanadylphenylalanine]amino}- 2H-l,4-pyridodiazepin-2-one; l,3-Dihydro-l-[(L-methionyl)-carbonylmethyl)-5-phenyl- 3(R,S)-{[(N-acetyl)-4-vanadylphenylalanine]amino}-2H-l,4-pyridodiazepin-2-one; 1,3- Dihydro-l-[(L-leucyl)-carbonylmethyl)-5-phenyl-3(R,S)-{[(N-acetyl)-4- vanadylphenylalanine]amino}-2H-l,4-pyridodiazepin-2-one; l,3-Dihydro-l-[(L-prolyl)- carbonylmethyl)-5-phenyl-3(R,S)-{[(N-acetyl)-4-vanadylphenylalanine]amino}-2H-l,4- pyridodiazepin-2-one; l,3-Dihydro-l-[(L-valyl)-carbonylmethyl)-5-phenyl-3(R,S)-{[(N- acetyl)-4-vanadylphenylalanine]amino}-2H-l,4-pyridodiazepin-2-one; l,3-Dihydro-l-[(L- aspartyl)-carbonylmethyl)-5-phenyl-3(R,S)-{[(N-acetyl)-4-vanadylphenylalanine]amino}- 2H- 1 ,4-pyridodiazepin-2-one; 1 ,3-Dihydro-l -[(L-asparginyl)-carbonylmethyl)-5-phenyl- 3(R,S)-{[(N-acetyl)-4-vanadylphenylalanine]amino}-2H-l,4-pyridodiazepin-2-one.
10. A compound represented by a general formula:
Figure imgf000071_0001
wherein
Rj represents hydrogen, a halogen, a lower alkyl, a lower alkenyl, a lower alkynyl, a carboxyl, an azido, -(CH2)m-R7, -(CH2)m-OH, -(CH2)m-O-lower alkyl, -(CH2)m-O-lower alkenyl, -(CH2)n-O-(CH2)m-R7, -(CH2)m-SH, -(CH2)m-S-lower alkyl, -(CH2)m-S-lower alkenyl, -(CH2)n-S-(CH2)m-R7,
Figure imgf000071_0002
O O O II
— (CH2)m-C-lower alkyl — (CH2)m-C-lower alkenyl , — (CH2)m-C-Y ,
O O
— (CH2)n-C-(CH2)rS-R7 , or — (CH^-C-O-R ;
R4 and R5 each independently represent hydrogen, lower alkyl, lower alkenyl, -(CH2)m-R7, -C(O)-lower alkyl, -C(O)-lower alkenyl, -C(O)-(CH2)m-R7, or R4 and R5 taken together with the N atom to which they are attached complete a heterocyclic ring having from 4 to 8 atoms in the ring structure;
-R--6 represents hydrogen, a lower alkyl, an lower alkenyl, -(CH2)m-R7, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt forming ion;
R7 represents an aryl, a cycloalkyl, a cycloakenyl, or a heterocycle; Rg represents hydrogen, a halogen, a lower alkyl, a lower alkenyl, a lower alkynyl, a carboxyl, an azido, -(CH2)m-R7, -(CH2)m-OH, -(CH2)m-O-lower alkyl, -(CH2)m-O-lower alkenyl, -(CH2)n-O-(CH2)m-R7, -(CH2)m-SH, -(CH2)m-S-lower alkyl, -(CH2)m-S-lower alkenyl, -(CH2)n-S-(CH2)m-R7,
— (CH2)m-N — (CH2)m-C-N _(CH2) NHa-C- Hz
R5 ' NR5 '
O O O
— (CH2)m-C-lower alkyl t — (CH2)m-C-lower alkenyl , — (CH2)m-C-Y ,
O O
— (CH2)n-C-(CH2)rf R7 , or — (CH^-C-O-R ;
RjO represents an alpha-carbon sidechain of an amino acid residue;
R] l represents COOH or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, or a carboxy- terminal blocking group;
Ri2 represents NH-R17 or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, or an amino- terminal blocking group;
R]4 represents a halogen, a lower alkyl, a lower alkoxy, a lower alkylthio, -NO2, - CF3, -CN, and -OH;
Rj7 represents hydrogen or a C-terminally linked amino acid residue or peptide;
Y represents a phosphate or phosphate analog;
X] represents O or S; X2 represents hydrogen, a lower alkyl, -(CH )m-OH, -(CH )m- O-lower alkyl, a carboxyl, an amine, an amide, a nitrosyl, a sulfhydryl, a sulfonyl, or a sulfonamide;
n is zero or an integer in the range of 1 to 6; m is zero or an integer in the range of 1 to 6; and p is an integer in the range of 1 to 6.
11. The compound of claim 10, wherein Rj is selected from a group consisting of -(CH2)m-benzyl, -(CH2)n-S-(CH2)m-benzyl, -(CH2)n-O-(CH2)m-benzyl, -(CH2)m-pyridyl, -(CH2)n-S-(CH2)m-pyridyl, and -(CH2)n-O-(CH2)m-pyridyl, wherein each of said benzyl and pyridyl moieties can be substituted at one or more positions with a halogen, a lower alkyl, a lower alkoxy,a lower alkylthio, -NO2, -CF3, -CN, and -OH.
12. The compound of claim 10, wherein R10 is an alpha-carbon sidechain of an amino acid residue selected from a group consisting of leucine, isoleucine, methionine, proline, valine, aspartic acid, and asparagine.
13. The compound of claim 10, wherein Y is selected from a group consisting of
Figure imgf000073_0001
, — (CH2)m-BeF3 , and — (CH2)m-AlF3
Figure imgf000073_0002
wherein m is zero or an integer in the range of 1 to 6; X is absent or represents O, S, or N; Dj represents O or S; D2 represents N3, SH2, NH2, or NO2; and R15 and Ri6 each independently represent hydrogen, a lower alkyl, or a pharmeceutically acceptable salt, or R15 and R16 taken together with the O-P-O, O-B-O, O-V-O or O-As-O atoms to which they are attached complete a heterocyclic ring having from 5 to 8 atoms in the ring structure.
14. A compound represented by a general formula:
Figure imgf000073_0003
Rg represents hydrogen or an amino acid sidechain;
RjO represents an alpha-carbon sidechain of an amino acid residue;
Rj j represents COOH or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, or a carboxy- terminal blocking group;
Rl2 represents NH2 or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, or an amino- terminal blocking group; and
Y represents a phosphate or phosphate analog.
15. The compound of claim 14, wherein Y is selected from a group consisting of
Figure imgf000074_0001
, — (CH2)m-BeF3 , and — (CH2)m-AlF3
Figure imgf000074_0002
wherein m is zero or an integer in the range of 1 to 6; X is absent or represents O, S, or N; D j represents O or S; D2 represents N3, SH2, NH2, or NO2; and R15 and R]g each independently represent hydrogen, a lower alkyl, or a pharmeceutically acceptable salt, or R15 and R16 taken together with the O-P-O, O-B-O, O-V-O or O-As-O atoms to which they are attached complete a heterocyclic ring having from 5 to 8 atoms in the ring structure.
16. The compound of claim 14, wherein Rι0 is an alpha-carbon sidechain of an amino acid residue selected from a group consisting of leucine, isoleucine, methionine, proline, valine, aspartic acid, and asparagine.
17. The compound of claim 14, selected from a group consisting of 1,3 -Dihydro- 1-[(L- isoleucyl)-carbonylmethyl)-5-phenyl-3(R,S)-{[(N-acetyl)-phosphono-L-tyrosyl]amino}-2H- 1 ,4-benzodiazepin-2-one; 1 ,3-Dihydro-l -[(L-methionyl)-carbonylmethyl)-5-phenyl-3(R,S)- { [(N-acetyl)-phosphono-L-tyrosyl]amino } -2H- 1 ,4-benzodiazepin-2-one; 1 ,3 -Dihydro- 1 - [(L- leucyl)-carbonylmethyl)-5-phenyl-3(R,S)-{[(N-acetyl)-phosphono-L-tyrosyl]amino}-2H-l,4- benzodiazepin-2-one; l,3-Dihydro-l-[(L-prolyl)-carbonylmethyl)-5-phenyl-3(R,S)-{[(N- acetyl)-phosphono-L-tyrosyl]amino} -2H- 1 ,4-benzodiazepin-2-one; 1 ,3-Dihydro- 1 -[(L-valyl)- carbonylmethyl)-5-phenyl-3 (R,S)- { [(N-acety l)-phosphono-L-tyrosyl]amino } -2H- 1 ,4- benzodiazepin-2-one; l,3-Dihydro-l-[(L-aspartyl)-carbonylmethyl)-5-phenyl-3(R,S)-{[(N- acetyl)-phosphono-L-tyrosyl]amino}-2H-l,4-benzodiazepin-2-one; l,3-Dihydro-l-[(L- asparginyl)-carbonylmethyl)-5-phenyl-3(R,S)-{[(N-acetyl)-phosphono-L-tyrosyl]amino}-2H- l,4-benzodiazepin-2-one; l,3-Dihydro-l-[(L-isoleucyl)-carbonylmethyl)-5-phenyl-3(R,S)- { [(N-acety l)-4-boronylphenylalanine]amino } -2H- 1 ,4-benzodiazepin-2-one; 1 ,3 -Dihydro- 1 - [(L-methionyl)-carbonylmethyl)-5-phenyl-3(R,S)-{[(N-acetyl)-4- boronylphenylalanine]amino}-2H-l,4-benzodiazepin-2-one; l,3-Dihydro-l-[(L-leucyl)- carbonylmethyl)-5-phenyl-3(R,S)-{[(N-acetyl)-4-boronylphenylalanine]amino}-2H-l,4- benzodiazepin-2-one; l,3-Dihydro-l-[(L-prolyl)-carbonylmethyl)-5-phenyl-3(R,S)-{[(N- acetyl)-4-boronylphenylalanine]amino}-2H-l,4-benzodiazepin-2-one; 1, 3 -Dihydro- 1-[(L- valyl)-carbonylmethyl)-5-phenyl-3(R,S)-{[(N-acetyl)-4-boronylphenylalanine]amino}-2H- l,4-benzodiazepin-2-one; l,3-Dihydro-l-[(L-aspartyl)-carbonylmethyl)-5-phenyl-3(R,S)- { [(N-acetyl)-4-borony lpheny lalanine] amino } -2H- 1 ,4-benzodiazepin-2-one; 1 ,3 -Dihydro- 1 - [(L-asparginyl)-carbonylmethyl)-5-phenyl-3(R,S)-{[(N-acetyl)-4- boronylphenylalanine]amino}-2H-l,4-benzodiazepin-2-one; l,3-Dihydro-l-[(L-isoleucyl)- carbony lmethy l)-5 -pheny 1-3 (R, S)- { [(N-acety l)-4-arseny lpheny lalanine] amino } -2H- 1 ,4- benzodiazepin-2-one; 1 ,3-Dihydro- 1 -[(L-methionyl)-carbony lmethy l)-5-phenyl-3 (R,S)- { [(N- acety l)-4-arseny lphenylalanine] amino } -2H- 1 ,4-benzodiazepin-2-one ; 1 ,3 -Dihydro- 1 - [(L- leucyl)-carbonylmethyl)-5-phenyl-3(R,S)-{[(N-acetyl)-4-arsenylphenylalanine]amino}-2H- 1 ,4-benzodiazepin-2-one; 1 ,3-Dihydro-l -[(L-prolyl)-carbonylmethyl)-5-phenyl-3(R,S)-{[(N- acetyl)-4-arsenylphenylalanine]amino } -2H- 1 ,4-benzodiazepin-2-one; 1 ,3-Dihydro- 1 -[(L- valyl)-carbonylmethyl)-5-phenyl-3(R,S)-{[(N-acetyl)-4-arsenylphenylalanine]amino}-2H- 1 ,4-benzodiazepin-2-one; 1 ,3-Dihydro-l -[(L-aspartyl)-carbonylmethyl)-5-phenyl-3(R,S)- {[(N-acetyl)-4-arsenylphenylalanine]amino}-2H-l,4-benzodiazepin-2-one; 1, 3 -Dihydro- 1- [(L-asparginyl)-carbonylmethyl)-5-phenyl-3 (R,S)- { [(N-acetyl)-4- arsenylphenylalanine]amino}-2H-l,4-benzodiazepin-2-one; l,3-Dihydro-l-[(L-isoleucyl)- carbonylmethyl)-5-phenyl-3(R,S)-{[(N-acetyl)-4-phosphonomethylphenylalanine]amino}- 2H-1 ,4-benzodiazepin-2-one; 1 ,3 -Dihydro- 1 - [(L-methiony l)-carbonylmethyl)-5-phenyl- 3 (R, S)- { [(N-acety l)-4-phosphonomethy lpheny lalanine] amino } -2H- 1 ,4-benzodiazepin-2-one ; 1 ,3-Dihydro- 1 -[(L-leucyl)-carbonylmethyl)-5-phenyl-3(R,S)- { [(N-acetyl)-4- phosphonomethylphenylalanine]amino}-2H-l ,4-benzodiazepin-2-one; 1 ,3-Dihydro-l -[(L- prolyl)-carbonylmethyl)-5-phenyl-3 (R,S)- { [(N-acetyl)-4- phosphonomethylphenylalanine]amino}-2H-l,4-benzodiazepin-2-one; 1, 3 -Dihydro- 1-[(L- valyl)-carbonylmethyl)-5-phenyl-3 (R,S)- { [(N-acetyl)-4- phosphonomethylphenylalaninejamino } -2H- 1 ,4-benzodiazepin-2-one; 1 ,3-Dihydro- 1 -[(L- aspartyl)-carbonylmethyl)-5-phenyl-3(R,S)-{[(N-acetyl)-4- phosphonomethylphenylalanine]amino}-2H-l,4-benzodiazepin-2-one; l,3-Dihydro-l-[(L- asparginyl)-carbonylmethyl)-5-phenyl-3(R,S)-{[(N-acetyl)-4-phosphonomethyl- phenylalaninejamino} -2H- 1 ,4-benzodiazepin-2-one; 1 ,3-Dihydro- 1 -[(L-isoleucyl)- carbonylmethyl)-5-phenyl-3(R,S)-{[(N-acetyl)-4-vanadylphenylalanine]amino}-2H-l,4- benzodiazepin-2-one; l,3-Dihydro-l-[(L-methionyl)-carbonylmethyl)-5-phenyl-3(R,S)-{[(N- acetyl)-4-vanadylphenylalanine]amino}-2H-l,4-benzodiazepin-2-one; l,3-Dihydro-l-[(L- leucy l)-carbony lmethy l)-5 -pheny 1-3 (R, S)- { [(N-acety l)-4- vanady lphenylalanine] amino } -2H- l,4-benzodiazepin-2-one; l,3-Dihydro-l-[(L-prolyl)-carbonylmethyl)-5-phenyl-3(R,S)-{[(N- acetyl)-4-vanadylphenylalanine]amino}-2H-l,4-benzodiazepin-2-one; l,3-Dihydro-l-[(L- valyl)-carbonylmethyl)-5-phenyl-3(R,S)-{[(N-acetyl)-4-vanadylphenylalanine]amino}-2H- 1 ,4-benzodiazepin-2-one; 1 ,3-Dihydro-l -[(L-aspartyl)-carbonylmethyl)-5-phenyl-3(R,S)- { [(N-acetyl)-4-vanadylphenylalanine]amino}-2H-l ,4-benzodiazepin-2-one; 1 ,3 -Dihydro- 1 - [(L-asparginyl)-carbonylmethyl)-5-phenyl-3 (R,S)- { [(N-acetyl)-4- vanadylphenylalanine]amino}-2H-l,4-benzodiazepin-2-one.
18. A peptidomimetic having the general formula α-amino-N-[2,3-dihydro-l-(2-AA-2- oxoethyl)-l-azepin-3-yl]-PTyr, wherein PTyr represents a phosphotyrosine or a phosphotyrosine analog carboxy-terminally linked with the 3-amino moiety of said azepine, and AA represents a peptide or single amino acid residue amino-terminally linked with an acetylaldehyde moiety of said azepine to form a 1-ethylamide linkage, wherein said azepine mimics a dipeptidyl amide backbone, and said PTyr, said azepine, and said AA together comprise a peptidyl analog of the general formula PTyr-Xaa-Xaa-AA.
19. The peptidomimetic of claim 18, wherein PTyr is represented by the general formula
Figure imgf000076_0001
,and Y is selected from a group consisting of
Figure imgf000076_0002
, — (CH2)m-BeF3 , and — (CH2)m-AlF3
Figure imgf000076_0003
wherein m is zero or an integer in the range of 1 to 6; X is absent or represents O, S, or N; Dj represents O or S; D2 represents N3, SH2, NH2, or NO2; and RJ5 and RJ6 each independently represent hydrogen, a lower alkyl, or a pharmeceutically acceptable salt, or R^ and Rjg taken together with the O-P-O, O-B-O, O-V-O or O-As-O atoms to which they are attached complete a heterocyclic ring having from 5 to 8 atoms in the ring structure.
20. The peptidomimetic of claim 18, wherein said phosphotyrosine analog is a non- hydrolyzable analog.
21. The peptidomimetic of claim 18, wherein AA is an amino acid selected from a group consisting of leucine, isoleucine, methionine, proline, valine, aspartic acid, and asparagine.
22. The peptidomimetic of claim 18, wherein said azepine is a 1 ,4-diazepine.
23. The peptidomimetic of claim 22, wherein said 1 ,4-diazepine is a 1,4-benzodiazepine.
24. The peptidomimetic of claim 23, wherein said peptidomimetic comprises a derivative of a 3-amino-l-(2-oxoethyl)-l,4-benzodiazepin-2-one, said PTyr being covalently attached to said benzodiazepine by an amide bond with said 3-amino moiety, and said AA being attached to said benzodiazepine by an amide bond with said 1-acetylaldehyde moiety.
25. The peptidomimetic of claim 18, wherein said azepine is a 1 -azepine.
26. The peptidomimetic of claim 25, wherein said 1 -azepine is selected from a group consisting of a 1-benzoazepine and a 1 -pyridinoazepine.
27. The peptidomimetic of claim 18, wherein said peptidomimetic is capable of selectively binding to a phosphotyrosine binding site of an SH2 domain and thereby inhibiting binding of a protein containing said SH2 domain with a phosphotyrosine residue of a target phosphoprotein.
28. The peptidomimetic of claim 27, wherein said SH2-containing protein is selected from a group consisting of Src, Lck, Fps, phosphatidylinositol-3-kinases, ras GTPase- activating protein, Fyn, Lyk, Fgr, Fes, ZAP-70, Abl, Crk, Nek, Sem-5, p85, phospholipase C, SHPTP1, SHPTP2, corkscrew, Syk, Lyn, Yes, Hck, Dsrc, Tec, Atk/Bpk, Itk/Tsk, Arg, Csk, tensin, Vav, She, Emt, Grb2, Syp, Blk, Bpk 113TF, 91TF, and a Janus kinases.
29. The peptidomimetic of claim 27, wherein said SH2-containing protein and said target phosphoprotein are involved in an intracellular signaling pathway for an oncogene, said peptidyl-diazepine able to inhibit said signaling pathway and thereby modulate a function of said oncogene.
30. The peptidomimetic of claim 27, wherein said SH2-containing protein and said target phosphoprotein are involved in an intracellular signaling pathway for a cytokine or a growth factor, said peptidyl-diazepine able to inhibit said signaling pathway and modulate a biological activity of said cytokine or growth factor.
31. A boronophenyl compound represented by the general formula V:
Figure imgf000078_0001
wherein
Y represents a substitution at one of the meta, ortho or para positions of the phenyl moiety, Y being a borono given by the general formula
Figure imgf000078_0002
Rj 5 and R^ each independently represent hydrogen, a lower alkyl, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, or R15 and Rjg taken together with the O-B-O atoms to which they are attached complete a heterocyclic ring having from 5 to 8 atoms in the ring structure;
R'l4 is absent or represents one or more substituents at remaining ring positions, which substituents are selected from halogens, lower alkyls, lower alkoxys, a hydroxyl, amino, nitro, thiol, amines, imines, amides, carbonyls, carboxyls, silyls, ethers, thioethers, sulfonyls, selenoethers, ketones, aldehydes, esters, or -(CH2)m-R7, -CF3, or -CN
X8 and X9 each, independently, represent a methylene, an ethylene, an acetylene, an amine, a carbonyl, a phosphonyl, a sulfer, an oxygen, or a selenium;
R'] 7 is absent, or represents hydrogen, halogens, alkyls, alkenyls, alkynyls, hydroxyl, amino, nitro, thiol, amines, imines, amides, phosphoryls, phosphonates, phosphines, carbonyls, carboxyls, silyls, ethers, thioethers, sulfonyls, selenoethers, ketones. aldehydes, esters, or -(CH2)m-R7, or R'17 represents an amino acid residue or peptide condensed with x8; R'3 is absent, or represents hydrogen, halogens, alkyls, alkenyls, alkynyls, hydroxyl, amino, nitro, thiol, amines, imines, amides, phosphoryls, phosphonates, phosphines, carbonyls, carboxyls, silyls, ethers, thioethers, sulfonyls, selenoethers, ketones, aldehydes, esters, or -(CH2)m-R7, or R'3 represents an amino acid residue or peptide condensed with X9;
R7 represents an aryl, a cycloalkyl, a cycloalkenyl, a heterocycle or a polycycle; m, independently for each occurence in formula V, is zero or an integer in the range of 1 to 8; and n is 1, 2 or 3.
32. The compound of claim 31 , represented by:
Figure imgf000079_0001
wherein R15, Rj6, R'17, R'3, Xg, X9, n and m are as defined in claim 31.
33. The compound of claim 31, wherein m is in the range of 1 to 3, and n is 1.
34. A peptidomimetic comprising a peptide or peptide analog including one or more amino acid residues having sidechains represented by the formula:
Figure imgf000079_0002
wherein
Y represents a substitution at one of the meta, ortho or para positions of the phenyl moiety, Y' being a borono given by the general formula
Figure imgf000079_0003
Rj5 and Rjg each independently represent hydrogen, a lower alkyl, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, or RJ5 and R]6 taken together with the O-B-O atoms to which they are attached complete a heterocyclic ring having from 5 to 8 atoms in the ring structure; R'j4 is absent or represents one or more substituents at remaining ring positions, which substituents are selected from halogens, lower alkyls, lower alkoxys, a hydroxyl, amino, nitro, thiol, amines, imines, amides, carbonyls, carboxyls, silyls, ethers, thioethers, sulfonyls, selenoethers, ketones, aldehydes, esters, or -(CH2)m-R7, -CF3, or -CN
Xg and X9 each, independently, represent a methylene, an ethylene, an acetylene, an a
R7 represents an aryl, a cycloalkyl, a cycloalkenyl, a heterocycle or a polycycle; m, independently for each occurence, is zero or an integer in the range of 1 to 8; and n is 1, 2 or 3, wherein the peptidomimetic is at least a dipeptide in length.
35. The peptidomimetic of claim 34, which peptidomimetic includes a cross-linking agent for covalently or non-covalently immobilizing the peptidomimetic.
36. The peptidomimetic of claim 34, which peptidomimetic includes a detectable label for detecting the peptidomimetic.
37. The peptidomimetic of claim 34, wherein said peptidomimetic is capable of selectively binding to a phosphotyrosine binding site of an SH2 domain and thereby inhibiting binding of a protein containing said SH2 domain with a phosphotyrosine residue of a target phosphoprotein.
38. The peptidomimetic of claim 37, wherein said SH2-containing protein is selected from a group consisting of Src, Lck, Fps, phosphatidylinositol-3-kinases, ras GTPase- activating protein, Fyn, Lyk, Fgr, Fes, ZAP-70, Abl, Crk, Nek, Sem-5, p85, phospholipase C, SHPTP1, SHPTP2, corkscrew, Syk, Lyn, Yes, Hck, Dsrc, Tec, Atk/Bpk, Itk/Tsk, Arg, Csk, tensin, Vav, She, Emt, Grb2, Syp, Blk, Bpk 113TF, 91TF, and a Janus kinases.
39. The peptidomimetic of claim 37, wherein said SH2-containing protein and said target phosphoprotein are involved in an intracellular signaling pathway for an oncogene, said peptidyl-diazepine able to inhibit said signaling pathway and thereby modulate a function of said oncogene.
40. The peptidomimetic of claim 34, which peptidomimetic inhibits a tyrosine kinase.
41. The peptidomimetic of claim 34, which peptidomimetic inhibits a tyrosine phosphatase.
42. The peptidomimetic of claim 34, which peptidomimetic is a peptide analog selected from the group consisting of benzodiazepines, substituted gama lactam rings, C-7 mimics keto-methylene pseudopeptides, β-turn dipeptide cores, β-aminoalcohols, diaminoketones, methyleneamino-modifed, retro-inverso analogs, retro-enantio analogs, trans-olefins, and phosphonate derivatives.
43. The peptidomimetic of claim 34, which peptidomimetic is an analog of peptide including the sequence pTyr-X-X-AA, wherein pTyr represents a phosphotyrosine, each X independently represents any amino acid residue, and AA is selected from the group consisting of leucine, isoleucine, methionine, proline, valine, aspartic acid, and asparagine.
44. A method of modulating an intracellular signaling pathway in a cell comprising disrupting an SH2-mediated interaction between two proteins in the intracellular signaling pathway by contacting the cell with a peptidomimetic having the general formula α-amino- N-[2,3-dihydro-l-(2-AA-2-oxoethyl)-l-azepin-3-yl]-PTyr, wherein PTyr represents a phosphotyrosine or a phosphotyrosine analog carboxy-terminally linked with the 3 -amino moiety of said azepine, and AA represents a peptide or single amino acid residue amino- terminally linked with an acetylaldehyde moiety of said azepine to form a 1-ethylamide linkage, wherein said azepine mimics a dipeptidyl amide backbone, and said PTyr, said azepine, and said AA together comprise a peptidyl analog of the general formula PTyr-Xaa- Xaa-AA, said AA selected on the basis of the binding specificty of the SH2-mediated interaction.
45. A pharmaceutical preparation comprising a therapeutically-effective amount of the compound of claim 1 for inhibiting an intracellular signaling pathway in cells in of an animal being treating.
46. A pharmaceutical preparation comprising a therapeutically-effective amount of the peptidomimetic of claim 18 for inhibiting an intracellular signaling pathway in cells in of an animal being treating.
47. A pharmaceutical preparation comprising a therapeutically-effective amount of the compound of claim 32 for inhibiting an intracellular signaling pathway in cells in of an animal being treating.
48. A pharmaceutical preparation comprising a therapeutically-effective amount of the peptidomimetic of claim 34 for inhibiting an intracellular signaling pathway in cells in of an animal being treating.
PCT/US1995/003225 1994-03-15 1995-03-15 Inhibitors of sh2 domain interactions WO1995025118A2 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US08/214,643 US5580979A (en) 1994-03-15 1994-03-15 Phosphotyrosine peptidomimetics for inhibiting SH2 domain interactions
US08/214,643 1994-03-15

Publications (2)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO1995025118A2 true WO1995025118A2 (en) 1995-09-21
WO1995025118A3 WO1995025118A3 (en) 1995-11-16

Family

ID=22799886

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/US1995/003225 WO1995025118A2 (en) 1994-03-15 1995-03-15 Inhibitors of sh2 domain interactions

Country Status (2)

Country Link
US (2) US5580979A (en)
WO (1) WO1995025118A2 (en)

Cited By (26)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
EP0728482A2 (en) * 1995-02-10 1996-08-28 Smithkline Beecham Corporation Use of hcp specific compounds to enhance erythropoiesis
WO1996027797A2 (en) * 1995-03-08 1996-09-12 Hsc Research And Development Limited Partnership Zap 70 inhibitors and methods for treatment of zap 70 signal transduction disorders
EP0801574A1 (en) * 1995-10-18 1997-10-22 Cor Therapeutics, Inc. Modulation of integrin-mediated signal transduction
WO1997042501A1 (en) * 1996-05-07 1997-11-13 Boehringer Ingelheim Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Phosphotyrosine mimics and methods for identifying and using same
EP0809490A1 (en) * 1995-02-10 1997-12-03 Smithkline Beecham Corporation Use of lck sh2 specific compounds to treat autoimmune diseases and allograft rejection
EP0835104A1 (en) * 1995-06-30 1998-04-15 Smithkline Beecham Corporation Use of stat 5 sh2 domain specific compounds to enhance erythropoiesis
WO1998028268A2 (en) * 1996-12-23 1998-07-02 Elan Pharmaceuticals, Inc. CYCLOALKYL, LACTAM, LACTONE AND RELATED COMPOUNDS AS β-AMYLOID PEPTIDE RELEASE INHIBITORS
WO1999019306A2 (en) * 1997-10-10 1999-04-22 Board Of Regents, The University Of Texas System 2,3-benzodiazepin-2-one derivatives, their preparation and their use as inhibitors of protein tyrosine kinases
WO1999032453A1 (en) * 1997-12-22 1999-07-01 Elan Pharmaceuticals, Inc. POLYCYCLIC α-AMINO-⊂-CAPROLACTAMS AND RELATED COMPOUNDS
FR2782997A1 (en) * 1998-09-08 2000-03-10 Hoechst Marion Roussel Inc NOVEL BENZODIAZEPINONE DERIVATIVES, PREPARATION METHOD AND INTERMEDIATES THEREOF, MEDICAMENT APPLICATION AND PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOSITIONS COMPRISING THE SAME
US6054470A (en) * 1997-12-18 2000-04-25 Boehringer Ingelheim Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Src family SH2 domain inhibitors
EP1007076A1 (en) * 1997-03-10 2000-06-14 Smithkline Beecham Corporation Method of antagonizing the human src sh2 domain
US6156784A (en) * 1997-12-18 2000-12-05 Boehringer Ingelheim Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compounds useful as phosphotyrosine mimics
FR2796381A1 (en) * 1999-07-12 2001-01-19 Hoechst Marion Roussel Inc Thiazepin and caprolactam bicyclic derivatives, useful in the treatment of e.g. osteoporosis and other bone disorders, infections, allergies or cancers
US6509331B1 (en) 1998-06-22 2003-01-21 Elan Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Deoxyamino acid compounds, pharmaceutical compositions comprising same, and methods for inhibiting β-amyloid peptide release and/or its synthesis by use of such compounds
US6528505B1 (en) 1998-06-22 2003-03-04 Elan Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Cyclic amino acid compounds pharmaceutical compositions comprising same and methods for inhibiting β-amyloid peptide release and/or its synthesis by use of such compounds
US6541466B2 (en) 1996-12-23 2003-04-01 Athena Neurosciences, Inc. Cycloalkyl, lactam, lactone and related compounds, pharmaceutical compositions comprising same, and methods for inhibiting β-amyloid peptide release and/or its synthesis by use of such compounds
WO2003041729A1 (en) * 2001-09-26 2003-05-22 Albert Einstein College Of Medicine Of Yeshiva University Ptp1b inhibitors and ligands
US6569851B1 (en) 1998-06-22 2003-05-27 Elan Pharmaceutials, Inc. Cycloalkyl, lactam, lactone and related compounds, pharmaceutical compositions comprising same, and methods for inhibiting β-amyloid peptide release and/or its synthesis by use of such compounds
US6683075B1 (en) 1996-12-23 2004-01-27 Athena Neurosciences, Inc. Cycloalkyl, lactam, lactone and related compounds, pharmaceutical compositions comprising same, and methods for inhibiting β-amyloid peptide release and/or its synthesis by use
US6774125B2 (en) 1998-06-22 2004-08-10 Elan Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Deoxyamino acid compounds, pharmaceutical compositions comprising same, and methods for inhibiting β-amyloid peptide release and/or its synthesis by use of such compounds
US6838455B2 (en) 1998-06-22 2005-01-04 Athena Neurosciences, Inc. Deoxyamino acid compounds, pharmaceutical compositions comprising same, and methods for inhibiting beta-amyloid peptide release and/or its synthesis by use of such compounds
US6958330B1 (en) 1998-06-22 2005-10-25 Elan Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Polycyclic α-amino-ε-caprolactams and related compounds
US7736911B2 (en) 2004-04-15 2010-06-15 Albert Einstein College Of Medicine Of Yeshiva University Activity-based probes for protein tyrosine phosphatases
CN108721622A (en) * 2017-04-14 2018-11-02 中国科学院上海高等研究院 Inhibit reagent and the application of liver fibrosis
CN109627313A (en) * 2017-10-09 2019-04-16 华中科技大学 The PTB domain protein and its coded sequence of a kind of IRS-1 of mutation and application

Families Citing this family (72)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20040116365A1 (en) * 2002-12-10 2004-06-17 Isis Pharmaceuticals Inc. Modulation of Lck expression
US5776716A (en) * 1994-02-01 1998-07-07 Terrapin Technologies, Inc. Methods for identifying agents which block the interaction of fyn with PKC-theta, and uses thereof
US6770446B1 (en) * 1994-06-14 2004-08-03 Wyeth Cell systems having specific interaction of peptide binding pairs
CA2231330A1 (en) * 1995-09-15 1997-03-20 Alice Marcy A high throughput assay using fusion proteins
US5776696A (en) * 1995-09-15 1998-07-07 Merck & Co., Inc. High throughput assay using fusion proteins
US5783398A (en) * 1995-09-15 1998-07-21 Merck & Co., Inc. High throughput assay using fusion proteins
US6028053A (en) * 1995-10-27 2000-02-22 Mount Sinai Hospital Corporation Peptide inhibitors of a phosphotyrosine-binding domain containing protein
EP0874639A4 (en) * 1995-10-27 1999-07-28 Mount Sinai Hospital Corp Peptide inhibitors of a phosphotyrosine-binding domain containing protein
US6117641A (en) 1996-04-11 2000-09-12 Mitotix, Inc. Assays and reagents for identifying anti-fungal agents and uses related thereto
DE69713759T2 (en) 1996-04-11 2003-03-13 Mitotix Inc ASSAYS AND REAGANCES FOR THE IDENTIFICATION OF FUNGICIDAL ACTIVE SUBSTANCES AND THEIR USE
US6727082B1 (en) 1996-04-11 2004-04-27 Gpc Biotech Inc. Assays and reagents for identifying anti-fungal agents, and uses related thereto
US5786152A (en) * 1996-04-26 1998-07-28 Amgen Inc. Methods of inhibiting syp binding to a CTLA-4 receptor
US6054286A (en) * 1996-06-18 2000-04-25 Telik, Inc. Methods to identify immunomodulators using cognate interaction of PKC-theta
US5922697A (en) * 1996-10-02 1999-07-13 Warner-Lambert Company Compounds, compositions and methods for inhibiting the binding of proteins containing an SH2 domain to cognate phosphorylated proteins
US6063794A (en) 1996-10-11 2000-05-16 Cor Therapeutics Inc. Selective factor Xa inhibitors
US6262047B1 (en) 1996-10-11 2001-07-17 Cor Therapeutics, Inc. Selective factor Xa inhibitors
US6194435B1 (en) 1996-10-11 2001-02-27 Cor Therapeutics, Inc. Lactams as selective factor Xa inhibitors
US6369080B2 (en) 1996-10-11 2002-04-09 Cor Therapeutics, Inc. Selective factor Xa inhibitors
US6194557B1 (en) 1996-11-18 2001-02-27 Cor Therapeutics, Inc. Nucleic acid molecules encoding Bap-1 proteins
US6060588A (en) * 1996-11-18 2000-05-09 Cor Therapeutics, Inc. Bap-1 proteins
PT944645E (en) * 1996-12-06 2005-06-30 Vertex Pharma INHIBITORS OF INTERLEUCINA CONVERTER ENZYME 1BETA
EP0942925B1 (en) * 1996-12-06 2006-11-22 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Inhibitors of interleukin-1 beta converting enzyme
US20030096760A1 (en) * 1997-03-10 2003-05-22 Smithklinebeecham Corporation Method of antagonizing the human SRC SH2 domain
EP0977772A1 (en) 1997-04-14 2000-02-09 Cor Therapeutics, Inc. SELECTIVE FACTOR Xa INHIBITORS
NZ500352A (en) 1997-04-14 2001-10-26 Cor Therapeutics Inc Cyclic diaza selective factor Xa inhibitors
US6211183B1 (en) 1997-04-14 2001-04-03 Cor Therapeutics, Inc. Selective factor Xa inhibitors
US6333321B1 (en) * 1997-08-11 2001-12-25 Cor Therapeutics, Inc. Selective factor Xa inhibitors
US6228854B1 (en) 1997-08-11 2001-05-08 Cor Therapeutics, Inc. Selective factor Xa inhibitors
US6218382B1 (en) 1997-08-11 2001-04-17 Cor Therapeutics, Inc Selective factor Xa inhibitors
US6312941B1 (en) 1997-11-26 2001-11-06 The Regents Of The University Of Michigan Compositions and methods for identifying signaling pathway agonists and antagonists
CA2313348A1 (en) * 1997-12-09 1999-06-17 Children's Medical Center Corporation Soluble inhibitors of vascular endothelial growth factor and use thereof
US6365185B1 (en) * 1998-03-26 2002-04-02 University Of Cincinnati Self-destructing, controlled release peroral drug delivery system
US6355786B1 (en) 1998-10-30 2002-03-12 Vanderbilt University Purified and isolated protein zero related (PZR) and therapeutic and screening methods using same
US6307090B1 (en) 1999-01-22 2001-10-23 The United States Of America As Represented By The Department Of Health And Human Services Acylated oligopeptide derivatives having cell signal inhibiting activity
US7226991B1 (en) * 1999-03-23 2007-06-05 United States Of America, Represented By The Secretary, Department Of Health And Human Services Phenylalanine derivatives
EP1163262B1 (en) * 1999-03-23 2011-05-11 THE GOVERNMENT OF THE UNITED STATES OF AMERICA as represented by the SECRETARY OF THE DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH AND HUMAN SERVICES Phenylalanine derivatives
US7132392B1 (en) 1999-10-22 2006-11-07 The United States Of America As Represented By The Department Of Health And Human Services Inhibition of cell motility and angiogenesis by inhibitors of Grb2-SH2-domain
US7871981B2 (en) * 1999-10-22 2011-01-18 The United States Of America As Represented By The Department Of Health And Human Services Inhibition of cell motility, angiogenesis, and metastasis
AU2001251612A1 (en) 2000-04-14 2001-10-30 Millennium Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Roles of jak/stat family members in tolerance induction
CA2419870A1 (en) * 2000-08-22 2002-02-28 Yang Gao Sh2 domain binding inhibitors
US7425537B2 (en) * 2000-08-22 2008-09-16 The United States Of America As Represented By The Secretary Of The Department Of Health And Human Services SH2 domain binding inhibitors
EP1469873A4 (en) 2001-11-26 2007-10-03 Tufts College Peptidomimetic inhibitors of post-proline cleaving enzymes
CA2466870A1 (en) * 2001-11-26 2003-06-05 Trustees Of Tufts College Methods for treating autoimmune disorders, and reagents related thereto
US7691967B2 (en) * 2002-04-30 2010-04-06 Trustees Of Tufts College Smart pro-drugs of serine protease inhibitors
US20040138104A1 (en) * 2003-01-14 2004-07-15 The Government Of The United States Of America Represented By The Secretary, Peptides
US20040242568A1 (en) 2003-03-25 2004-12-02 Syrrx, Inc. Dipeptidyl peptidase inhibitors
EP1625122A1 (en) 2003-05-14 2006-02-15 Takeda San Diego, Inc. Dipeptidyl peptidase inhibitors
US7678909B1 (en) 2003-08-13 2010-03-16 Takeda Pharmaceutical Company Limited Dipeptidyl peptidase inhibitors
US7169926B1 (en) 2003-08-13 2007-01-30 Takeda Pharmaceutical Company Limited Dipeptidyl peptidase inhibitors
BRPI0413452A (en) 2003-08-13 2006-10-17 Takeda Pharmaceutical compound, pharmaceutical composition, kit, article of manufacture, and methods of inhibiting dpp-iv, therapeutic, and treating a disease state, cancer, autoimmune disorders, a condition and HIV infection
WO2005026148A1 (en) 2003-09-08 2005-03-24 Takeda San Diego, Inc. Dipeptidyl peptidase inhibitors
US20050119163A1 (en) * 2003-09-18 2005-06-02 The Government Of The United States Of America, As Represented By The Secretary, SH2 domain binding inhibitors
BRPI0507972A (en) * 2004-02-23 2007-07-24 Tufts College compound, pharmaceutical composition, use of a compound, method for inhibiting the proteolytic activity of a postproline cleavage enzyme and packaged pharmaceutical composition
US7732446B1 (en) 2004-03-11 2010-06-08 Takeda Pharmaceutical Company Limited Dipeptidyl peptidase inhibitors
CN102134231B (en) 2004-03-15 2020-08-04 武田药品工业株式会社 Dipeptidyl peptidase inhibitors
WO2005118555A1 (en) 2004-06-04 2005-12-15 Takeda Pharmaceutical Company Limited Dipeptidyl peptidase inhibitors
WO2006019965A2 (en) 2004-07-16 2006-02-23 Takeda San Diego, Inc. Dipeptidyl peptidase inhibitors
JP2008524331A (en) 2004-12-21 2008-07-10 武田薬品工業株式会社 Dipeptidyl peptidase inhibitor
US20060275356A1 (en) * 2005-05-25 2006-12-07 Burgess James W Pharmaceutical compositions for treating or preventing coronary artery disease
US20070099970A1 (en) * 2005-08-19 2007-05-03 Mackerell Alexander Immunomodulatory compounds that target and inhibit the pY'binding site of tyrosene kinase p56 LCK SH2 domain
PL1942898T5 (en) 2005-09-14 2014-10-31 Takeda Pharmaceuticals Co Dipeptidyl peptidase inhibitors for treating diabetes
US8222411B2 (en) 2005-09-16 2012-07-17 Takeda Pharmaceutical Company Limited Dipeptidyl peptidase inhibitors
AU2006301747B2 (en) * 2005-10-12 2011-11-24 Analyticon Discovery Gmbh Synergistic pharmaceutical composition containing a peptide with 2 to 5 amino acids
WO2007112347A1 (en) 2006-03-28 2007-10-04 Takeda Pharmaceutical Company Limited Dipeptidyl peptidase inhibitors
US8324383B2 (en) 2006-09-13 2012-12-04 Takeda Pharmaceutical Company Limited Methods of making polymorphs of benzoate salt of 2-[[6-[(3R)-3-amino-1-piperidinyl]-3,4-dihydro-3-methyl-2,4-dioxo-1(2H)-pyrimidinyl]methyl]-benzonitrile
DK2073810T3 (en) * 2006-09-13 2011-10-31 Takeda Pharmaceutical Use of 2-6- (3-amino-piperidin-1-yl) -3-methyl-2,4-dioxo-3,4-dihydro-2H-pyrimidin-1-ylmethyl-4-fluoro-benzonitrile in the treatment of diabetes, cancer, autoimmune diseases and HIV infection
TW200838536A (en) 2006-11-29 2008-10-01 Takeda Pharmaceutical Polymorphs of succinate salt of 2-[6-(3-amino-piperidin-1-yl)-3-methyl-2,4-dioxo-3,4-dihydro-2H-pyrimidin-1-ylmethy]-4-fluor-benzonitrile and methods of use therefor
US8093236B2 (en) 2007-03-13 2012-01-10 Takeda Pharmaceuticals Company Limited Weekly administration of dipeptidyl peptidase inhibitors
US8642067B2 (en) 2007-04-02 2014-02-04 Allergen, Inc. Methods and compositions for intraocular administration to treat ocular conditions
US8466096B2 (en) * 2007-04-26 2013-06-18 Afton Chemical Corporation 1,3,2-dioxaphosphorinane, 2-sulfide derivatives for use as anti-wear additives in lubricant compositions
AR081930A1 (en) 2010-06-16 2012-10-31 Ardea Biosciences Inc THIOACETATE COMPOUNDS
CN108383893A (en) 2011-08-30 2018-08-10 塔夫茨大学信托人 The proteasome inhibitor that FAP- for treating solid tumor is activated

Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO1994007913A1 (en) * 1992-09-25 1994-04-14 Warner-Lambert Company Peptide antagonists of sh2 binding and therapeutic uses thereof
WO1994008600A1 (en) * 1992-10-09 1994-04-28 Joslin Diabetes Center Inhibition of signal transduction molecules

Family Cites Families (12)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
DE3204403A1 (en) * 1982-02-09 1983-08-11 Dr. Karl Thomae Gmbh, 7950 Biberach NEW PYRIDOBENZODIAZEPINONE, METHOD FOR THE PRODUCTION THEREOF AND MEDICINAL PRODUCTS CONTAINING THESE COMPOUNDS
US4820834A (en) * 1984-06-26 1989-04-11 Merck & Co., Inc. Benzodiazepine analogs
US4755508A (en) * 1984-06-26 1988-07-05 Merck & Co., Inc. Benzodiazepine analogs and use as antogonists of gastrin and cholecystokinin
US4594191A (en) * 1985-04-22 1986-06-10 Merck & Co., Inc. Process for preparing a benzodiazepinedione derivative
US4628084A (en) * 1986-01-02 1986-12-09 Merck & Co., Inc. Process for 3-acylamino benzodiazepines
DE3610848A1 (en) * 1986-04-01 1987-10-15 Boehringer Ingelheim Kg NEW 1,4-DIAZEPINE
US4650797A (en) * 1986-07-18 1987-03-17 E. R. Squibb & Sons, Inc. Substituted 1,5-benzodiazepine compounds
US4898861A (en) * 1987-03-26 1990-02-06 Hoffmann-La Roche Inc. Method for inhibiting the proliferation of tumor cells
US4957915A (en) * 1989-02-27 1990-09-18 Biomeasure, Inc. Benzodiazepine analogs
US5175159A (en) * 1989-10-05 1992-12-29 Merck & Co., Inc. 3-substituted-1,4-benzodiazepines as oxytocin antagonists
AU9122391A (en) * 1990-11-30 1992-06-25 Smithkline Beecham Corporation Hiv protease inhibitors
CA2056809A1 (en) * 1990-12-07 1992-06-08 Mark G. Bock Benzodiazepine analogs

Patent Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO1994007913A1 (en) * 1992-09-25 1994-04-14 Warner-Lambert Company Peptide antagonists of sh2 binding and therapeutic uses thereof
WO1994008600A1 (en) * 1992-10-09 1994-04-28 Joslin Diabetes Center Inhibition of signal transduction molecules

Non-Patent Citations (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
A.F. Spatola ' Peptide Backbone Modifications: A Structure-Activity *
CELL, vol.69, 1 May 1992, NA US pages 413 - 423 W.J. FANTL ET AL. 'Distinct Phosphotyrosines on a Growth Factor Receptor Bind to Specific Molecules that Mediate Different Signaling Pathways' cited in the application *
CELL, vol.72, 12 March 1992, NA US pages 767 - 778 Z. SONGYANG ET AL. 'SH2 Domains Recognize Specific Phosphopeptide Sequences' cited in the application *
J. MED. CHEM. (1988), 31(3), 510-16 CODEN: JMCMAR;ISSN: 0022-2623, SAMANEN, J. ET AL 'Effects of D-amino acid substitution on antagonist activities of angiotensin II analogs' *
J. MED. CHEM. (1989), 32(6), 1366-70 CODEN: JMCMAR;ISSN: 0022-2623, SAMANEN, JAMES ET AL 'The role of position four in angiotensin II antagonism: a structure-activity study' *
R.M. Freidinger 'Design and comparison of *

Cited By (44)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
EP0728482A2 (en) * 1995-02-10 1996-08-28 Smithkline Beecham Corporation Use of hcp specific compounds to enhance erythropoiesis
EP0728482A3 (en) * 1995-02-10 1999-10-20 Smithkline Beecham Corporation Use of hcp specific compounds to enhance erythropoiesis
EP0809490A4 (en) * 1995-02-10 1999-10-20 Smithkline Beecham Corp Use of lck sh2 specific compounds to treat autoimmune diseases and allograft rejection
EP0809490A1 (en) * 1995-02-10 1997-12-03 Smithkline Beecham Corporation Use of lck sh2 specific compounds to treat autoimmune diseases and allograft rejection
WO1996027797A2 (en) * 1995-03-08 1996-09-12 Hsc Research And Development Limited Partnership Zap 70 inhibitors and methods for treatment of zap 70 signal transduction disorders
WO1996027797A3 (en) * 1995-03-08 1996-10-17 Hsc Res Dev Lp Zap 70 inhibitors and methods for treatment of zap 70 signal transduction disorders
EP0835104A1 (en) * 1995-06-30 1998-04-15 Smithkline Beecham Corporation Use of stat 5 sh2 domain specific compounds to enhance erythropoiesis
EP0835104A4 (en) * 1995-06-30 1999-10-20 Smithkline Beecham Corp Use of stat 5 sh2 domain specific compounds to enhance erythropoiesis
EP0801574A4 (en) * 1995-10-18 2002-09-04 Cor Therapeutics Inc Modulation of integrin-mediated signal transduction
EP0801574A1 (en) * 1995-10-18 1997-10-22 Cor Therapeutics, Inc. Modulation of integrin-mediated signal transduction
WO1997042501A1 (en) * 1996-05-07 1997-11-13 Boehringer Ingelheim Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Phosphotyrosine mimics and methods for identifying and using same
US6683075B1 (en) 1996-12-23 2004-01-27 Athena Neurosciences, Inc. Cycloalkyl, lactam, lactone and related compounds, pharmaceutical compositions comprising same, and methods for inhibiting β-amyloid peptide release and/or its synthesis by use
US6541466B2 (en) 1996-12-23 2003-04-01 Athena Neurosciences, Inc. Cycloalkyl, lactam, lactone and related compounds, pharmaceutical compositions comprising same, and methods for inhibiting β-amyloid peptide release and/or its synthesis by use of such compounds
US7153847B2 (en) 1996-12-23 2006-12-26 Athena Neurosciences, Inc. Cycloalkyl, lactam, lactone and related compounds, pharmaceutical compositions comprising same, and methods for inhibiting β-amyloid peptide release and/or its synthesis by use of such compounds
WO1998028268A2 (en) * 1996-12-23 1998-07-02 Elan Pharmaceuticals, Inc. CYCLOALKYL, LACTAM, LACTONE AND RELATED COMPOUNDS AS β-AMYLOID PEPTIDE RELEASE INHIBITORS
US6667305B1 (en) 1996-12-23 2003-12-23 Athena Neurosciences, Inc. Cycloalkyl, lactam, lactone and related compounds, pharmaceutical compositions comprising same, and methods for inhibiting β-amyloid peptide release and/or its synthesis by use of such compounds
US6653303B1 (en) 1996-12-23 2003-11-25 Athena Neurosciences, Inc. Cycloalkyl, lactam, lactone and related compounds, pharmaceutical compositions comprising same, and methods for inhibiting β-amyloid peptide release and/or its synthesis by use of such compounds
US6632811B2 (en) 1996-12-23 2003-10-14 Athena Neurosciences, Inc. Cycloalkyl, lactam, lactone and related compounds, pharmaceutical compositions comprising same, and methods for inhibiting β-amyloid peptide release and/or its synthesis by use of such compounds
US6579867B2 (en) 1996-12-23 2003-06-17 Athena Neurosciences, Inc. Cycloalkyl, lactam, lactone and related compounds, pharmaceutical compositions comprising same, and methods for inhibiting β-amyloid peptide release and/or its synthesis by use of such compounds
WO1998028268A3 (en) * 1996-12-23 1998-10-08 Athena Neurosciences Inc CYCLOALKYL, LACTAM, LACTONE AND RELATED COMPOUNDS AS β-AMYLOID PEPTIDE RELEASE INHIBITORS
US6559141B2 (en) 1996-12-23 2003-05-06 Athena Neurosciences, Inc. Cycloalkyl, lactam, lactone and related compounds, pharmaceutical compositions comprising same, and methods for inhibiting β-amyloid peptide release and/or its synthesis by use of such compounds
US6544978B2 (en) 1996-12-23 2003-04-08 Athena Neurosciences, Inc. Cycloalkyl, lactam, lactone and related compounds, pharmaceutical compositions comprising same, and methods for inhibiting β-amyloid peptide release and/or its synthesis by use of such compounds
EP1007076A4 (en) * 1997-03-10 2004-10-27 Smithkline Beecham Corp Method of antagonizing the human src sh2 domain
EP1007076A1 (en) * 1997-03-10 2000-06-14 Smithkline Beecham Corporation Method of antagonizing the human src sh2 domain
WO1999019306A3 (en) * 1997-10-10 1999-07-29 Univ Texas 2,3-benzodiazepin-2-one derivatives, their preparation and their use as inhibitors of protein tyrosine kinases
WO1999019306A2 (en) * 1997-10-10 1999-04-22 Board Of Regents, The University Of Texas System 2,3-benzodiazepin-2-one derivatives, their preparation and their use as inhibitors of protein tyrosine kinases
US6156784A (en) * 1997-12-18 2000-12-05 Boehringer Ingelheim Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compounds useful as phosphotyrosine mimics
US6054470A (en) * 1997-12-18 2000-04-25 Boehringer Ingelheim Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Src family SH2 domain inhibitors
WO1999032453A1 (en) * 1997-12-22 1999-07-01 Elan Pharmaceuticals, Inc. POLYCYCLIC α-AMINO-⊂-CAPROLACTAMS AND RELATED COMPOUNDS
US6838455B2 (en) 1998-06-22 2005-01-04 Athena Neurosciences, Inc. Deoxyamino acid compounds, pharmaceutical compositions comprising same, and methods for inhibiting beta-amyloid peptide release and/or its synthesis by use of such compounds
US6509331B1 (en) 1998-06-22 2003-01-21 Elan Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Deoxyamino acid compounds, pharmaceutical compositions comprising same, and methods for inhibiting β-amyloid peptide release and/or its synthesis by use of such compounds
US6569851B1 (en) 1998-06-22 2003-05-27 Elan Pharmaceutials, Inc. Cycloalkyl, lactam, lactone and related compounds, pharmaceutical compositions comprising same, and methods for inhibiting β-amyloid peptide release and/or its synthesis by use of such compounds
US6958330B1 (en) 1998-06-22 2005-10-25 Elan Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Polycyclic α-amino-ε-caprolactams and related compounds
US6906056B2 (en) 1998-06-22 2005-06-14 Elan Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Cycloalkyl, lactam, lactone and related compounds, pharmaceutical compositions comprising same, and methods for inhibiting β-amyloid peptide release and/or its synthesis by use of such compounds
US6528505B1 (en) 1998-06-22 2003-03-04 Elan Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Cyclic amino acid compounds pharmaceutical compositions comprising same and methods for inhibiting β-amyloid peptide release and/or its synthesis by use of such compounds
US6696438B2 (en) 1998-06-22 2004-02-24 Elan Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Cyclic amino acid compounds, pharmaceutical compositions comprising same, and methods for inhibiting β-amyloid peptide release and/or its synthesis by use of such compounds
US6774125B2 (en) 1998-06-22 2004-08-10 Elan Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Deoxyamino acid compounds, pharmaceutical compositions comprising same, and methods for inhibiting β-amyloid peptide release and/or its synthesis by use of such compounds
FR2782997A1 (en) * 1998-09-08 2000-03-10 Hoechst Marion Roussel Inc NOVEL BENZODIAZEPINONE DERIVATIVES, PREPARATION METHOD AND INTERMEDIATES THEREOF, MEDICAMENT APPLICATION AND PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOSITIONS COMPRISING THE SAME
WO2000014073A1 (en) * 1998-09-08 2000-03-16 Hoechst Marion Roussel Benzodiazepinone derivatives, preparation method and intermediates therefor, use as medicines and compositions
FR2796381A1 (en) * 1999-07-12 2001-01-19 Hoechst Marion Roussel Inc Thiazepin and caprolactam bicyclic derivatives, useful in the treatment of e.g. osteoporosis and other bone disorders, infections, allergies or cancers
WO2003041729A1 (en) * 2001-09-26 2003-05-22 Albert Einstein College Of Medicine Of Yeshiva University Ptp1b inhibitors and ligands
US7736911B2 (en) 2004-04-15 2010-06-15 Albert Einstein College Of Medicine Of Yeshiva University Activity-based probes for protein tyrosine phosphatases
CN108721622A (en) * 2017-04-14 2018-11-02 中国科学院上海高等研究院 Inhibit reagent and the application of liver fibrosis
CN109627313A (en) * 2017-10-09 2019-04-16 华中科技大学 The PTB domain protein and its coded sequence of a kind of IRS-1 of mutation and application

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
WO1995025118A3 (en) 1995-11-16
US5776902A (en) 1998-07-07
US5580979A (en) 1996-12-03

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US5776902A (en) Boronophenyl analogs of phospholyrosines
US4885283A (en) Phosphinic acid derivatives
JP3793242B2 (en) 2,4-Dioxo-imidazolidine derivatives
AU679085B2 (en) Benzodiazepine analogs
TW577879B (en) Novel compounds exhibiting growth hormone secretagogue activity, pharmaceutical composition containing the same and their uses
CN1330638C (en) Substituted imidazolidine derivatives, their prepn., their use and pharmaceutical prepn. comprising them
PL193391B1 (en) Nonpeptidyl compounds and pharmaceutical compositions
US20100152099A1 (en) Macrocyclic compounds for inhibition of tumor necrosis factor alpha
JP3495369B2 (en) 4-oxo-thiooxoimidazolidine derivatives as platelet aggregation inhibitors
GB2074571A (en) Alpha-benzyl-substituted amides
EP0716661B1 (en) Pseudo- and non-peptide bradykinin receptor antagonists
US5817756A (en) Pseudo- and non-peptide bradykinin receptor antagonists
KR100306506B1 (en) Polypeptide bombesin antagonist
HU213114B (en) Process for producing nonapeptide bombesin antagonists and pharmaceutical compositions containing them
IE912132A1 (en) Derivatives of tetrapeptides as cck agonists
KR20010023656A (en) Peptides containing an arginine mimetic for the treatment of bone metabolic disorders, their production, and drugs containing these compounds
EP4309741A1 (en) Cyclic compound having inhibitory effect selective for kras but not for hras and nras
CA2222939A1 (en) Peptides and compounds that bind to the il-1 receptor
WO2003099857B1 (en) Antagonistic peptides of prostaglandin e2 receptor subtype ep4
HUT76645A (en) N-substituted naphthofused lactams, pharmaceutical compositions containing them and their use
US6638941B1 (en) Conformationallly constrained peptidomimetics as β-turn templates and modulators of SH3 domains
JPH069628A (en) Hiv protease inhibitor containing hydroxyethylene equivalentweight type ditholanylglycine
Burke Jr et al. N-terminal carboxyl and tetrazole-containing amides as adjuvants to Grb2 SH2 domain ligand binding
US7629318B2 (en) Immunosuppressant compounds, methods and uses related thereto
HU205143B (en) Process for producing peptides having t cell suppressor activity and pharmaceutical compositions comprising same

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
AK Designated states

Kind code of ref document: A2

Designated state(s): CA JP

AL Designated countries for regional patents

Kind code of ref document: A2

Designated state(s): AT BE CH DE DK ES FR GB GR IE IT LU MC NL PT SE

121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application
DFPE Request for preliminary examination filed prior to expiration of 19th month from priority date (pct application filed before 20040101)
122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase
NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: CA